ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM GI

SECTION EC MA

EM

LC

EC
CONTENTS
FE
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX.........................4 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................38
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION............................6 Introduction ................................................................38 CL
Special Service Tools ..................................................6 Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................38
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................6 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................39
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................49 MT
‘‘AIR BAG’’ ...................................................................8 OBD System Operation Chart ...................................52
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) CONSULT ..................................................................57
System of Engine ........................................................8 Generic Scan Tool (GST) ..........................................68 AT
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ....................9 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction......................70
Precautions ................................................................10 Introduction ................................................................70
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL Diagnostic Worksheet................................................70
TF
SYSTEM.........................................................................12 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow ........................72
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................12 Work Flow..................................................................72 PD
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............13 Description for Work Flow .........................................73
System Diagram ........................................................15 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection ..............74
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................16 Basic Inspection.........................................................74 FA
System Chart .............................................................17 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description ........80
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Inspection
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................18 Priority Chart..............................................................80 RA
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................18 Fail-Safe Chart...........................................................81
Distributor Ignition (DI) System .................................20 Symptom Matrix Chart...............................................82
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................21 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor BR
Fuel Cut Control ........................................................22 Mode ..........................................................................85
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ...........................23 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Description .................................................................23 Mode ..........................................................................87
ST
Inspection...................................................................23 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .......................89
Evaporative Emission Line Drawing..........................26 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT RS
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................28 INCIDENT.......................................................................98
Description .................................................................28 Description .................................................................98
Inspection...................................................................28 Common I/I Report Situations ...................................98 BT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................29 Diagnostic Procedure ................................................98
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................29 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY..........99
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................29 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit....................99 HA
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................29 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100..................104
Injector Removal and Installation ..............................30 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) ................................104
Fast Idle Cam (FIC)...................................................31 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105..................113 EL
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Absolute Pressure Sensor.......................................113
Adjustment .................................................................32 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110 ..................120
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................120
IDX
 CONTENTS (Cont’d.)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115 ..................126 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) .........................252
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400..................258
(Circuit) ....................................................................126 EGR Function (Close) .............................................258
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120..................131 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402..................266
Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................131 EGRC-BPT Valve Function .....................................266
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125..................145 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420..................271
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ...........145 Three Way Catalyst Function ..................................271
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130..................150 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440..................276
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
HO2S) ......................................................................150 (Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) ...........................276
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131..................157 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443..................286
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) ........................................157 Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) .................286
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132..................164 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446..................292
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) ........................................164 Control Valve (Circuit)..............................................292
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133..................171 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450..................297
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) ........................................171 Pressure Sensor ......................................................297
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134..................179 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500..................303
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ..................................303
(Front HO2S) ...........................................................179 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505..................308
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135..................186 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater......................186 Control (AAC) Valve ................................................308
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137..................190 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510..................314
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Closed Throttle Position Switch...............................314
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S).........................................190 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0605..................320
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138..................198 Engine Control Module (ECM) ................................320
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105 ..................322
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S).........................................198 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139..................206 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Valve ........................................................................322
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S).........................................206 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1148 ..................331
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140..................214 Closed Loop Control................................................331
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320..................333
(Rear HO2S)............................................................214 Ignition Signal ..........................................................333
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141..................220 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336..................340
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater ......................220 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171..................224 (COG) ......................................................................340
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)............224 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400..................345
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172..................229 EGRC-Solenoid Valve .............................................345
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side).............229 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401..................350
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180..................234 EGR Temperature Sensor .......................................350
Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor ...............................234 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402..................356
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304....238 EGR Function (Open)..............................................356
No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440..................363
Misfire ......................................................................238 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325..................243 (Small Leak) (Positive Pressure).............................363
Knock Sensor (KS) ..................................................243 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444..................373
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335..................247 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) ............247 Volume Control Solenoid Valve ...............................373
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340..................252 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446..................381

EC-2
 CONTENTS (Cont’d.) GI

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1776..................416
Control Valve (Close)...............................................381 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve ................416 MA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447..................386 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT .................420
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System Overheat ..................................................................420
Purge Flow Monitoring.............................................386 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE EM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448..................392 ITEMS...........................................................................423
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Injector .....................................................................423
LC
Control Valve (Open) ...............................................392 Start Signal ..............................................................426
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490..................397 Fuel Pump ...............................................................429
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)...............397 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch .......................434 EC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491..................402 IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve ......................................437
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve ............................402 MIL & Data Link Connectors ...................................441
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706..................407 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........442 FE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch ........................407 General Specifications.............................................442
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1775..................412 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................442
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (Circuit)...412 CL
When you read wiring diagrams:
● Read GI section, ‘‘HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS’’. MT
● Read EL section, ‘‘POWER SUPPLY ROUTING’’ for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, ‘‘HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART IN
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES’’ and ‘‘HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL AT
INCIDENT’’.

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-3
 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*5 DTC*5
Items Reference Items Reference
(CONSULT screen terms) CONSULT page (CONSULT screen terms) CONSULT page
ECM*1 ECM*1
GST*2 GST*2
Unable to access ECM — — EC-81 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 0201 EC-333
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 0908 EC-145 KNOCK SEN/CIRCUIT P0325 0304 EC-243
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 0803 EC-113 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 0102 EC-104
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 0401 EC-120 MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR P1105 1302 EC-322
CAM POS SEN/CIR P0340 0101 EC-252 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0701 EC-238
CLOSED LOOP P1148 0307 EC-331 NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
P0000 0505 —
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 0203 EC-314 FAILURE INDICATED

COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 0103 EC-126 NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC Flash-

No DTC EC-49
FAILURE INDICATED ing*4
CPS/CIRC (OBD) COG P1336 0905 EC-340
OVERHEAT — 0208 EC-420
CPS/CIRCUIT (OBD) P0335 0802 EC-247
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1003 EC-407
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0608 EC-238
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 0214 EC-373
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0607 EC-238
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 1008 EC-286
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0606 EC-238
REAR O2 SENSOR P0138 0510 EC-198
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0605 EC-238
REAR O2 SENSOR P0137 0511 EC-190
ECM P0605 0301 EC-320
REAR O2 SENSOR P0140 0512 EC-214
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0302 EC-258
REAR O2 SENSOR P0139 0707 EC-206
EGR SYSTEM P1402 0514 EC-356
RR O2 SEN HEATER P0141 0902 EC-220
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 0305 EC-350
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 0403 EC-131
EGRC SOLENOID/V P1400 1005 EC-345
TOR CONV CLTCH S/V P1775 0904 EC-412
EGRC-BPT VALVE P0402 0306 EC-266
TOR CONV CLTCH S/V P1776 0513 EC-416
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 0111 EC-386
TW CATALYST SYSTEM P0420 0702 EC-271
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 0213 EC-363
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 0311 EC-402
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 0705 EC-276
VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 0801 EC-397
EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 0704 EC-297
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0104 EC-303
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0130 0303 EC-150
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 0215 EC-381
FR O2 SEN HEATER P0135 0901 EC-186
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 0309 EC-392
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0133 0409 EC-171
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 0903 EC-292
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0132 0410 EC-164
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0131 0411 EC-157
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These
numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0134 0412 EC-179 *2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
FUEL SYS DIAG-LEAN P0171 0115 EC-224 *3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: While engine is running.
FUEL SYS DIAG-RICH P0172 0114 EC-229
*5: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 0402 EC-234
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0205 EC-308

EC-4
 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC GI
DTC*5 DTC*5
Items Reference Items Reference
CONSULT
ECM*1 (CONSULT screen terms) page CONSULT
ECM*1 (CONSULT screen terms) page MA
GST*2 GST*2
— — Unable to access ECM EC-81 P0402 0306 EGRC-BPT VALVE EC-266

No DTC
Flash- NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
EC-49
P0420 0702 TW CATALYST SYSTEM EC-271 EM
ing*4 FAILURE INDICATED P0440 0705 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-276
NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC P0443 1008 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-286
P0000 0505 —
FAILURE INDICATED
P0446 0903 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-292 LC
P0100 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-104
P0450 0704 EVAPO SYS PRES SEN EC-297
P0105 0803 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-113
P0500 0104 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-303
P0110 0401 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-120
P0505 0205 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-308
EC
P0115 0103 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC EC-126
P0510 0203 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-314
P0120 0403 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-131
P0605 0301 ECM EC-320
P0125 0908 *COOLAN T SEN/CIRC EC-145 FE
P1105 1302 MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR EC-322
P0130 0303 FRONT O2 SENSOR EC-150
P1148 0307 CLOSED LOOP EC-331
P0131 0411 FRONT O2 SENSOR EC-157
P1320 0201 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-333 CL
P0132 0410 FRONT O2 SENSOR EC-164
P1336 0905 CPS/CIRC (OBD) COG EC-340
P0133 0409 FRONT O2 SENSOR EC-171
P1400 1005 EGRC SOLENOID/V EC-345
P0134 0412 FRONT O2 SENSOR EC-179
P1401 0305 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-350
MT
P0135 0901 FR O2 SEN HEATER EC-186
P1402 0514 EGR SYSTEM EC-356
P0137 0511 REAR O2 SENSOR EC-190
P1440 0213 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-363
P0138 0510 REAR O2 SENSOR EC-198 AT
P1444 0214 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-373
P0139 0707 REAR O2 SENSOR EC-206
P1446 0215 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-381
P0140 0512 REAR O2 SENSOR EC-214
P0141 0902 RR O2 SEN HEATER EC-220
P1447 0111 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-386 TF
P1448 0309 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-392
P0171 0115 FUEL SYS DIAG-LEAN EC-224
P1490 0801 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-397
P0172 0114 FUEL SYS DIAG-RICH EC-229
P1491 0311 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V EC-402 PD
P0180 0402 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-234
P1706 1003 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-407
P0300 0701 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-238
P1775 0904 TOR CONV CLTCH S/V EC-412
P0301 0608 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-238 FA
P1776 0513 TOR CONV CLTCH S/V EC-416
P0302 0607 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-238
— 0208 OVERHEAT EC-420
P0303 0606 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-238
P0304 0605 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-238 *1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These RA
numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
P0325 0304 KNOCK SEN/CIRCUIT EC-243 *2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
P0335 0802 CPS/CIRCUIT (OBD) EC-247 *3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: While engine is running. BR
P0340 0101 CAM POS SEN/CIR EC-252
*5: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
P0400 0302 EGR SYSTEM EC-258
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-5
 PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

Special Service Tools

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening front heated oxygen
(J36471-A) sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench

NT379

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen

(J-38365) sensor
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench

NT636 a: 22 mm (0.87 in)

Commercial Service Tools

Tool name Description
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve open-
ing pressure

NT653

Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak

(J41416)

NT703

EVAP service port adapter Applying positive pressure through EVAP ser-
(J41413-OBD) vice port

NT704

Hose clipper Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the

( — ) fuel tank and EVAP canister applied to DTC
P1440 [EVAP control system (Small leak —
Positive pressure)]

NT720

EC-6
 PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
GI
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use
(J-43897-18) with anti-seize lubricant shown in Commercial
MA
(J-43897-12) Service Tools.

EM
a: J-43897-18-18mm diameter, for Zirconia Oxy-
gen Sensor
b: J-43897-12-12mm diameter, for Titania Oxy- LC
AEM488 gen Sensor
Anti-seize lubricant (Perma- Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tex™ 133 AR or equivalent tool when reconditioning exhaust system EC
meeting MIL specification threads.
MIL-A-907)
FE

CL

AEM489
MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-7
 PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

‘‘AIR BAG’’
The Supplemental Restraint System ‘‘AIR BAG’’, used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
severity of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System
consists of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and in the instrument panel on the
passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, a crash zone sensor (4WD models), warning lamp, wiring harness
and spiral cable.
The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where a
rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a
rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel, near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is
enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger
air bag is disabled and will not inflate in a frontal collision. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instru-
ment panel lights up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled
and is not affected by the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification.
● The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by
the customer. When the passenger air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled and
will not inflate in a frontal collision. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air
bag is enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure
the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle
arrived for service.

Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

System of Engine
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL Section, ‘‘Description’’, ‘‘HARNESS CONNEC-
TOR’’.
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer.

EC-8
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

Engine Fuel & Emission Control System GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

SEF236V

EC-9
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

Precautions
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.

SEF289H

● When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten secur-

ing bolt until the gap between orange indicators disap-
pears.
: 3.0 - 5.0 Nzm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)

SEF308Q

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

SEF291H

● Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference

Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-89.

MEF040D

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

‘‘OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK’’ or ‘‘DTC (Diagnostic
Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’.
The DTC should not be displayed in the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the
repair is completed. The ‘‘OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK’’
should be a good result if the repair is completed.

SEF217U

EC-10
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions (Cont’d)
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never GI
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor. MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF348N

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-11
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

Circuit Diagram

AEC867A

EC-12
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

Engine Control Component Parts Location GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

SEF312V

EC-13
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location
(Cont’d)

SEF313V SEF578P

EC-14
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

System Diagram GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC868A

EC-15
 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

Vacuum Hose Drawing

SEF107V

Note: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge
hoses.

EC-16
 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

System Chart GI

Camshaft position sensor c Fuel injection & mixture ratio c

control Injectors MA
Mass air flow sensor c
EM
Distributor ignition system c Power transistor
Engine coolant temperature sensor c

LC
Front heated oxygen sensor c
c IACV-AAC valve and
Idle air control system IACV-FICD solenoid valve
Ignition switch c
EC

Throttle position sensor c Fuel pump control c Fuel pump relay FE

*3
Closed throttle position switch c CL
Front heated oxygen sensor
monitor & on board diagnostic c Malfunction indicator lamp
Park/neutral position switch system (On the instrument panel)
c
MT
Air conditioner switch c

ECM
EGR control c EGRC-solenoid valve AT
Knock sensor c

TF
Intake air temperature sensor c Front heated oxygen sensor Front heated oxygen sensor
c
heater control heater
*1
PD
● EGR temperature sensor
● EVAP control system pressure c
sensor
Rear heated oxygen sensor c Rear heated oxygen sensor
heater control heater FA
Absolute pressure sensor c

RA
Battery voltage c EVAP canister purge flow con- EVAP canister purge volume
trol c control solenoid valve

Power steering oil pressure switch c

BR

Air conditioning cut control c Air conditioner relay

Vehicle speed sensor c ST

Tank fuel temperature sensor c

Torque converter clutch lock-up c Torque converter clutch sole- RS
cancellation control noid valve
*1
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) c
BT
*2 ●
EVAP canister vent control
Rear heated oxygen sensor valve
c
c
● Vacuum cut valve bypass HA
valve
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid
valve
EL

*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis. IDX
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions.

EC-17
 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed and piston position
c

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

c

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

c

Front heated oxygen sensor Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

c

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

c
Throttle valve idle position

Park/neutral position switch Gear position

c

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed c Injector

c ECM

Ignition switch Start signal

c

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

c

Knock sensor Engine knocking condition

c

Absolute pressure sensor Ambient barometric pressure

c

Battery Battery voltage

c

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation

c

Rear heated oxygen sensor* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

c
* Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.

BASIC MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION

SYSTEM INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compen-
determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the sated to improve engine performance under various
length of time the valve remains open (injection operating conditions as listed below.
pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a <Fuel increase>
program value in the ECM memory. The program ● During warm-up
value is preset by engine operating conditions. ● When starting the engine
These conditions are determined by input signals ● During acceleration
(for engine speed and intake air) from both the cam- ● Hot-engine operation
shaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. ● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

EC-18
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED GI
LOOP CONTROL)
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mix-
MA
ture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way cata-
lyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This sys-
tem uses a front heated oxygen sensor in the exhaust manifold to
monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
EM
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For
more information about the front heated oxygen sensor, refer to
EC-150. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of sto- LC
SEF651V ichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Rear heated oxygen sensor is located downstream of the three EC
way catalyst. Even if the switching characteristics of the front
heated oxygen sensor shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to sto-
ichiometric by the signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor. FE
OPEN LOOP CONTROL
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects CL
any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to
maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration MT
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of front heated oxygen sensor or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of front heated oxygen sensor at low AT
engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up TF
● When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
PD
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture
ratio signal transmitted from the front heated oxygen sensor. This
feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the FA
basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as
possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily con-
trolled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences RA
(i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes
during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical BR
mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed
in terms of ‘‘injection pulse duration’’ to automatically compen-
sate for the difference between the two ratios.
‘‘Fuel trim’’ refers to the feedback compensation value compared ST
against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term
fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
‘‘Short term fuel trim’’ is the short-term fuel compensation used to RS
maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from
the front heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the mixture ratio
is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal BT
then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich,
and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
‘‘Long term fuel trim’’ is overall fuel compensation carried out long- HA
term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel
trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to indi-
vidual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage EL
environment.

IDX

EC-19
 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle accord-
ing to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is run-
ning.

MEF522D

Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system

Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each
engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are
simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each
engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the
fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.

FUEL SHUT-OFF
MEF523D Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of
the engine at excessively high speeds.

Distributor Ignition (DI) System

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor c

Amount of intake air

Mass air flow sensor c

Engine coolant temperature

Engine coolant temperature sensor c

Throttle position
Throttle position sensor c
Throttle valve idle position
Vehicle speed ECM c
Power tran-
Vehicle speed sensor c sistor

Start signal
Ignition switch c

Engine knocking
Knock sensor c

Gear position
Park/neutral position switch c

Battery voltage
Battery c

EC-20
 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Distributor Ignition (DI) System (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GI
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best
air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine.
The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the MA
map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width
and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, EM
ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A°BTDC LC
SEF742M During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting EC
● During warm-up
● At idle
● Hot engine operation FE
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies.
The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking CL
zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard
system does not operate under normal driving conditions.
If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. MT
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition
timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
AT
Air Conditioning Cut Control
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE TF
Air conditioner ‘‘ON’’ signal
Air conditioner switch c

Throttle valve opening angle

PD
Throttle position sensor c

Camshaft position sensor

Engine speed FA
c

Engine coolant temperature Air

Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM c conditioner
c
relay
RA
Start signal
Ignition switch c
BR
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensor c

Power steering operation ST

Power steering oil pressure switch c

RS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes
This system improves engine operation when the air excessively high.
conditioner is used. ● When operating power steering and air condi- BT
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is tioner during low engine speed or when fully
turned off. releasing accelerator pedal.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. HA
● When cranking the engine.
EL

IDX

EC-21
 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine

speed)
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensor c

Neutral position
Park/neutral position switch c

ECM c
Throttle position Injectors
Throttle position sensor c

Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor c

If the engine speed is above 3,000 rpm with no load, (for example,
in neutral and engine speed over 3,000 rpm) fuel will be cut off after
some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on
engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm,
then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed
under ‘‘Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System’’, EC-18.

EC-22
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

Description GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF927U

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons AT

emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction
of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the
EVAP canister. TF
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canis-
ter which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there
when the engine is not operating. PD
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the
purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by FA
ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled
by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is propor-
tionally regulated as the air flow increases. RA
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off
the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling.
BR

ST

RS

BT
Inspection
EVAP CANISTER
HA
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port s
A and check that air flows freely through port
EL
sB .

IDX
SEF314V

EC-23
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Inspection (Cont’d)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP
canister and EVAP vent control valve.

AEC879A

FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (Built into fuel

filler cap)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.163 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.32 - 2.90
psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.5 kPa (−0.061 to −0.036 kg/cm2, −0.87 to
−0.51 psi)
SEF427N 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If
an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.

SEF943S

VACUUM CUT VALVE AND VACUUM CUT VALVE

BYPASS VALVE
Refer to EC-402.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-373.
TANK FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-234.

EC-24
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Inspection (Cont’d)
EVAP SERVICE PORT GI
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. MA

EM

LC
SEF462U

How to detect fuel vapor leakage EC

CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
FE
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE: CL
● Do not start engine.
● Improper installation of adapter to the service port may
cause a leak. MT
1. Attach the adapter securely to the EVAP SERVICE port.
SEF658U 2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. AT
4. Select the ‘‘EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE’’ of ‘‘WORK SUP-
PORT MODE’’ with CONSULT.
5. Touch ‘‘START’’. A bar graph (Pressure indicating dis- TF
play) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. PD
7. Remove adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to ‘‘Evapo-
rative Emission Line Drawing’’, EC-26. FA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF200U CAUTION:
Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. RA
NOTE:
Improper installation of adapter to service port may cause a
leak. BR
1. Attach the adapter securely to the EVAP service port
and pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port. ST
2. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both
EVAP canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve
bypass valve to make a closed EVAP system. RS
3. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP
SEF503V system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76
kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi). BT
4. Remove adapter and hose with pressure pump.
5. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to ‘‘Evapo-
rative Emission Line Drawing’’, EC-26. HA

EL

IDX

EC-25
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

Evaporative Emission Line Drawing

SEF108V

Note: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge
hoses.

EC-26
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Evaporative Emission Line Drawing (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC869A

EC-27
 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION

Description
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake col- into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
lector. through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is cover.
provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is
intake manifold. insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in
intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the the reverse direction.
PCV valve. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to valve does not meet the requirement. This is
handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilat- because some of the flow will go through the hose
ing air. connection to the intake collector under all condi-
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air duct tions.

AEC909

Inspection
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from breather sepa-
rator. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes
through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a fin-
ger is placed over the valve inlet.

SEC137A

VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

ET277

EC-28
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Fuel Pressure Release GI

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger. MA
1. Start engine.
2. Perform ‘‘FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE’’ in ‘‘WORK
SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT. EM
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make
sure that fuel pressure is released.
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. LC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF823K 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump.
2. Start engine. EC
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release
all fuel pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and reconnect fuel pump FE
fuse.

CL

MT
SEF316V

Fuel Pressure Check AT

● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent TF
parts.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. PD
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat-
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. FA
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine
SEF317V side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. RA
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling: BR
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected ST
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform ‘‘Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check’’. RS
SEF318V
BT
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from intake manifold. HA
2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as EL
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator. IDX
SEF718B

EC-29
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Injector Removal and Installation

1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove injector tube assembly with injectors from intake
manifold.
3. Remove injectors from injector tube assembly.
● Push injector tail piece.
● Do not pull on the connector.
4. Install injector to fuel tube assembly.
a. Clean exterior of injector tail piece.
SEF319V
b. Use new O-rings.
Always replace O-rings with new ones.
Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
5. Install injectors with fuel tube assembly to intake manifold.
Tighten in numerical order shown in the figure.
a. First, tighten all bolts to 9.3 to 10.8 Nzm (0.95 to 1.1 kg-m, 6.9
to 8.0 ft-lb).
b. Then, tighten all bolts to 21 to 26 Nzm (2.1 to 2.7 kg-m, 15 to
20 ft-lb).
6. Install fuel hoses to fuel tube assembly.
7. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
SEF116V After properly connecting injectors to fuel tube assembly,
check connections for fuel leakage.

SEF117V

EC-30
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Fast Idle Cam (FIC) GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FIC is installed on the throttle body to maintain adequate MA
engine speed while the engine is cold. It is operated by a volumet-
ric change in wax located inside the thermo-element. The thermo-
element is operated by engine coolant temperature. EM

LC
SEF500V

COMPONENT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT EC

1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. See ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode
with CONSULT. FE
3. Start engine and warm it up.
When engine temperature is 80±5°C (176±9°F), make
sure that the center of mark s
A is aligned with mark s
B CL
as shown in the figure.
MT
SEF522P

AT

TF

PD

FA
SEF501V

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RA
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness
connector and check resistance as shown in the figure. BR
3. Start engine and warm it up.
When the resistance of engine coolant temperature
sensor is 0.26 to 0.39 kV, make sure that the center of ST
mark s A is aligned with mark s B as shown in the figure.
● If NG, adjust by turning adjusting screw.
Adjusting screw tightening torque: RS
0.98 - 1.96 Nzm (10 - 20 kg-cm, 8.7 - 17.4 in-lb)
SEF536H
4. Stop engine.
5. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and see ‘‘COOLAN BT
TEMP/S’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
6. When engine coolant temperature is 25±5°C (77±9°F),
make sure that the center of mark s A is aligned with HA
mark s C as shown in the figure.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. When the resistance of engine coolant temperature EL
sensor is 1.65 to 2.40 kV, make sure that the center of
mark s A is aligned with mark s C as shown in the figure.
● If NG, replace thermo-element and perform the above inspec- IDX
tion and adjustment again.
SEF502V

EC-31
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

Adjustment
PREPARATION ● On models equipped with air conditioner,
● Make sure that the following parts are in checks should be carried out while the air
good order. conditioner is ‘‘OFF’’.
(1) Battery ● On models equipped with automatic
(2) Ignition system transaxle, when checking idle speed, igni-
(3) Engine oil and coolant levels tion timing and mixture ratio, checks should
(4) Fuses be carried out while shift lever is in ‘‘N’’ posi-
(5) ECM harness connector tion.
(6) Vacuum hoses ● When measuring ‘‘CO’’ percentage, insert
(7) Air intake system probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Turn off headlamps, heater blower.
(8) Fuel pressure ● Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
(9) Engine compression
(10) EGR valve operation
(11) Throttle valve
(12) EVAP system
Overall inspection sequence
INSPECTION

.
Perform diagnostic test mode II NG Repair or replace.
c
(Self-diagnostic results).

OK

.
Check & adjust ignition timing.
b

.
Check & adjust idle speed.
b

.
Check front heated oxygen sensor NG Check front heated oxygen sen- NG Repair or replace harness.
c c c
function. sor harness.

OK OK

.
Check CO%. OK Replace front heated oxygen sen-
c
sor.
NG

. .
Check emission control parts and NG Check front heated oxygen sensor OK
b c
repair or replace if necessary. function.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-32
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment (Cont’d) GI

START
MA
.
Visually check the following:
● Air cleaner clogging EM
● Hoses and ducts for leaks
● EGR valve operation
● Electrical connectors
● Gasket
LC
SEF810K ● Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operations

EC
.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge and ensure that engine FE
speed is below 1,000 rpm.

CL
.
Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about
2 minutes under no-load. MT
SEF247F
.
Perform ECM Self-diagnosis. AT
OK NG
.
Repair or replace components as necessary.
TF
b

.
PD
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
Rev engine two or three times under no-load, then run engine for
about 1 minute at idle speed. FA
SEF248F

. RA
1. Select ‘‘IGN TIMING ADJ’’ in WORK SUPPORT mode.
2. Touch ‘‘START’’.
OR BR
1. Stop engine and disconnect throttle position sensor
harness connector.
2. Start engine.
ST
.
Rev engine (2,000 - 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load and
run engine at idle speed. RS
SEF546N

.
BT
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
20°±2° BTDC (A/T in ‘‘N’’ position)
HA
. OK . NG

s
A
(Go to next page.)
s
B
(Go to next page.) EL

IDX
SEF320V

EC-33
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment (Cont’d)
s
A s
B

.
Adjust ignition timing to the specified value by turning dis-
b tributor after loosening bolts which secure distributor.
20°±2° BTDC (in ‘‘N’’ position)

s
F

SEF546N .
1. Select ‘‘IGN TIMING ADJ’’ in WORK SUPPORT
mode.
2. Touch ‘‘START’’.
OR
1. Stop engine and disconnect throttle position
sensor harness connector.
2. Start engine.

.
Check base idle speed.
Read idle speed in ‘‘IGN TIMING ADJ’’ mode
with CONSULT.
SEF240SA OR
Check idle speed.

750±50 rpm (in ‘‘N’’ position)

OK NG
. .
Rev engine (2,000 - 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-
load and run engine at idle speed.

.
Adjust idle speed by turning idle speed adjusting screw.
SEF913J 750±50 rpm (in ‘‘N’’ position)

.
Touch ‘‘Back’’.

OR
1. Stop engine and connect throttle position sen-
sor harness connector.
2. Start engine.

SEF602K
.
Rev engine (2,000 - 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-
load and run engine at idle speed.

sC
(Go to next page.)

EC-34
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment (Cont’d) GI
s
C

MA
.
Check target idle speed.
Read idle speed in ‘‘DATA MONI- EM
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
OR
Check idle speed.
LC
SEF712T
800±50 rpm (in ‘‘N’’ position)
EC
OK NG
.
Check IACV-AAC valve and replace if neces-
sary. FE

.
Check IACV-AAC valve harness and repair if CL
necessary.

. MT
Check ECM function* by substituting another
SEF957D
known good ECM.
AT
*: ECM may be the
cause of a problem,
but this is rarely the TF
case.
. .
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2
minutes under no-load. PD

. FA
Check front heated oxygen sensor signal.
SEF054P 1. See ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA
MONITOR’’ mode. RA
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm
under no-load (engine is warmed
up to normal operating
temperature.), check that the moni- BR
tor fluctuates between ‘‘LEAN’’ and
‘‘RICH’’ more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
1 cycle: RICH → LEAN → RICH ST
2 cycles: RICH → LEAN → RICH NG
→ LEAN → RICH s (Go to next
c D
OR page.) RS
1. Set the diagnostic test mode II
SEF217U
(front heated oxygen sensor moni-
tor).
2. Make sure that malfunction indica- BT
tor lamp goes on more than 5
times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
HA
OK
.
INSPECTION END EL

IDX

EC-35
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment (Cont’d)
s
D

.
Check front heated oxygen sensor harness:
1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground
cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector from ECM.
3. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness
connector and connect terminal for front heated
SEF508V oxygen sensor to ground with a jumper wire.
4. Check for continuity between terminal No. 50 of
ECM harness connector and ground metal on
vehicle body.
Continuity exists ... OK
Continuity does not exist ... NG

OK NG
.
Repair harness. s
c F
(Go to EC-34.)

.
SEF250P
Connect ECM harness connector to ECM.

.
1. Select ‘‘ENG COOLANT TEMP’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE
TEST’’ mode.
2. Set ‘‘COOLANT TEMP’’ at 5°C (41°F).
OR
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sen-
sor harness connector.
2. Connect a resistor (4.4 kV) between termi-
nals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.

.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant tem-
perature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
(Be careful to start engine after setting ‘‘COOLANT
TEMP’’ or installing a 4.4 kV resistor.)

.
Rev engine two or three times under no-load then run
engine at idle speed.

sE
(Go to next page.)

EC-36
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment (Cont’d) GI
s
E

.
MA
Check ‘‘CO’’%.
Idle CO: 2.9 - 10.8 % and engine runs smoothly.
After checking ‘‘CO’’% EM
Touch ‘‘BACK’’.

OR
1. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine LC
coolant temperature sensor.
SEF054P 2. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness
connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC
NG OK
.
FE
Replace front heated oxygen sensor.
1. See ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine
is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check CL
that the monitor fluctuates between ‘‘LEAN’’ and
‘‘RICH’’ more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 cycle: RICH → LEAN → RICH MT
2 cycles: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
SEF957D OR
1. Set the diagnostic test mode II (front heated oxygen
sensor monitor). AT
2. Make sure that malfunction indicator lamp goes on
more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.

NG OK TF
.

s
F
PD
(Go to
. . EC-34.)
Connect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector to
front oxygen sensor. FA
SEF217U
.
Check fuel pressure regulator. RA

.
Check mass air flow sensor.
BR

.
Check injector and clean or replace if necessary.
ST

.
RS
Check engine coolant temperature sensor.

.
BT
Check ECM function* by substituting another known good
ECM.

. HA
sF
(Go to EC-34.)
*: ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the EL
case.
● If a vehicle contains a part which is operating outside of design speci-
fications with no MIL illumination, the part shall not be replaced prior IDX
to emission testing unless it is determined that the part has been
tampered with or abused in such a way that the diagnostic system
cannot reasonably be expected to detect the resulting malfunction.

EC-37
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Introduction
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
● Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .................................................................................Mode 3 of SAE J1979
● Freeze Frame data .....................................................................................................Mode 2 of SAE J1979
● System Readiness Test (SRT) code ..........................................................................Mode 1 of SAE J1979
● 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC).......................................................Mode 7 of SAE J1979
● 1st Trip Freeze Frame data
● Test values and Test limits .........................................................................................Mode 6 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
Diagnostic test
mode II (Self-
X X*1 — — — —
diagnostic
results)
CONSULT X X X X X —
GST X X*2 X — X X
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
*2: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-81.).

Two Trip Detection Logic

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The ‘‘trip’’ in the ‘‘Two Trip Detection Logic’’ means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Lighting Lighting displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking Blinking
up up
Coolant over temperature
enrichment protection — DTC: — X — — — — X —
P0217
Misfire (Possible three way
catalyst damage)
X — — — X — X —
— DTC: P0300 - P0304 (0701,
0605 - 0608) is being detected
Misfire (Possible three way
catalyst damage)
— — X — — X — —
— DTC: P0300 - P0304 (0701,
0605 - 0608) is being detected
Closed loop control — DTC:
— X — — X — X —
P1148 (0307)
Fail-safe items (Refer to
— X — — X*1 — X*1 —
EC-81.)
Except above — — — X — X X —
*1: Except ‘‘ECM’’.

EC-38
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Emission-related Diagnostic Information GI

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic MA
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM
memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd EM
trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the
MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same LC
malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is per-
formed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that
blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. EC
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in ‘‘HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION’’. Refer to EC-48.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-46. These items are required by legal FE
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL CL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame MT
data as specified in ‘‘Work Flow’’ procedure Step II, refer to page EC-72. Then perform ‘‘Diagnostic trouble
code confirmation procedure’’ or ‘‘Overall function check’’ to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is
duplicated, the item requires repair. AT
How to read DTC and 1st trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. TF
1. The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnos-
tic Results) Examples: 0101, 0201, 1003, 1104, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
PD

2. CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. FA
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. RA
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II and GST do not indicate whether the
malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT (if available) BR
is recommended.

ST

RS

A sample of CONSULT display for DTC is shown at left. DTC or 1st

BT
trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS mode of CONSULT. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. HA
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be ‘‘0’’.
EL

IDX
SEF225U

EC-39
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d)
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be ‘‘[1t]’’.

SEF226U

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure
sensor at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or GST.
The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For details,
see EC-60.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.

Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 (0701, 0605 - 0608)
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114)
2 Except the above items
3 1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, first trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
first trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in ‘‘HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION’’. Refer to EC-48.

SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE

System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. It indicates whether the self-diag-
nostic tests for non-continuously monitored items have been completed or not.
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests of the on board diagnostic (OBD) II system may become the legal require-
ments in some states/areas. All SRT codes must be set in this case. Unless all SRT codes are set, conduct-
ing the I/M test may not be allowed.
SRT codes are set after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. This occurs regardless of
whether the diagnosis is in ‘‘OK’’ or ‘‘NG’’, and whether or not the diagnosis is performed in consecutive trips.
The following table lists the 5 SRT items (18 test items) for the ECM used in D22 models.

EC-40
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d) GI

SRT items Self-diagnostic test items

MA
Catalyst monitoring ● Three way catalyst function P0420 (0702)
● EVAP control system (Small leak — Negative pressure) P0440 (0705)
EVAP system monitoring ● EVAP control system (Small leak — Positive pressure) P1440 (0213) EM
● EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P1447 (0111)
● Front heated oxygen sensor (Response monitoring) P0133 (0409)
● Front heated oxygen sensor (Rich shift monitoring) P0132 (0410) LC
● Front heated oxygen sensor (Lean shift monitoring) P0131 (0411)
● Front heated oxygen sensor (Circuit) P0130 (0303)
●
Oxygen sensor monitoring Front heated oxygen sensor (High voltage) P0134 (0412) EC
● Rear heated oxygen sensor (Response monitoring) P0139 (0707)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor (Max. voltage monitoring) P0138 (0510)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor (Min. voltage monitoring) P0137 (0511) FE
● Rear heated oxygen sensor (High voltage) P0140 (0512)
● Front heated oxygen sensor heater P0135 (0901)
Oxygen sensor heater monitoring
● Rear heated oxygen sensor heater P0141 (0902) CL
● EGR function (Close) P0400 (0302)
EGR system monitoring ● EGR function (Open) P1402 (0514)
● EGRC-BPT valve function P0402 (0306) MT
Together with the DTC, the SRT code is cleared from the ECM memory using the method described later
(Refer to EC-48). In addition, after ECCS components/system are repaired or if the battery terminals remain AT
disconnected for more than 24 hours, all SRT codes may be cleared from the ECM memory.
How to display SRT code
TF
1. Selecting ‘‘SRT STATUS’’ in ‘‘DTC CONFIRMATION’’ mode with CONSULT.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a ‘‘CMPLT’’ is displayed on the CONSULT screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, ‘‘INCMP’’ is displayed. PD
2. Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
FA

A sample of CONSULT display for SRT code is shown at left. RA

‘‘INCMP’’ means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not
set. ‘‘CMPLT’’ means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
BR

ST

RS
SEF215U
BT
How to set SRT code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. The most efficient driving pat- HA
tern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be
performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EL

IDX

EC-41
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d)
Driving pattern

SEF933V

EC-42
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d) GI

● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road sur-
face conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, MA
etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the
diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B EM
refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be per-
formed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
— Sea level LC
— Flat road
— Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
— Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under nor- EC
mal conditions. SEF414S
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air tem-
perature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may *3: Checking the vehicle speed with CONSULT or GST is FE
also be performed. advised.
Pattern 1: ● The engine is started at the engine coolant *4: The driving pattern may be omitted when ‘‘PURG FLOW
temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) P1447’’ is performed using the ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’
(where the voltage between the ECM termi- mode with CONSULT.
CL
s s
nals 59 and 43 is 3.0 - 4.3V). *5: The driving pattern may be omitted when ‘‘EVAP SML
● The engine must be operated at idle speed LEAK P0440’’ is performed using the ‘‘DTC WORK SUP-
until the engine coolant temperature is PORT’’ mode with CONSULT. MT
greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage *6: The driving pattern may be omitted when all of the follow-
s
between the ECM terminals 59 and 43 iss ing are performed using the ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’
lower than 1.4V). mode with CONSULT. AT
● The engine is started at the tank fuel tem- ● ‘‘EGR SYSTEM P0400’’
perature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where ● ‘‘EGR SYSTEM P1402’’
the voltage between the ECM terminals 60 s *7: The driving pattern may be omitted when ‘‘EGRC-BPT/VLV
TF
and ground is less than 4.1V). P0402’’ is performed using the ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’
Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again mode with CONSULT.
even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can
be conducted. In this case, the time required for PD
diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3: ● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be
repeated at least 3 times. FA
On M/T models, shift gears following ‘‘suggested
upshift speeds’’ schedule on next page.
Pattern 4: ● Tests are performed after the engine has been
operated for at least 17 minutes. RA
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady
during steady-state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must BR
be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90
km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and ST
keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the
accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH)
again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. RS
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
● During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as BT
steady as possible. (The THROTL POS SEN value
of CONSULT should be between 0.8 to 1.2V.)
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the EGR system SRT is set. HA

EL

IDX

EC-43
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d)
Suggested transmission gear position for Suggested maximum speed in each gear
A/T models Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running
Set the selector lever in the ‘‘D’’ position with ‘‘OD’’ smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
ON. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for Always observe posted speed limits and drive
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate according to the road conditions to ensure safe
to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting
upshift speeds will vary according to road to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or
conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. loss of vehicle control.

Gear change ACCEL shift point 2-wheel drive models

(2H and 4H position) km/h (MPH) Gear km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 24 (15) 1st 48 (30)
2nd to 3rd 40 (25) 2nd 88 (55)
3rd to 4th 64 (40) 3rd 129 (80)
4th to 5th 72 (45) 4th & 5th — (—)
4-wheel drive models
2H/4H position
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 40 (25)
2nd 69 (43)
3rd 109 (68)
4th & 5th — (—)

EC-44
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d) GI
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST only — not applicable to CONSULT)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979. MA
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is ‘‘OK’’ or ‘‘NG’’ while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. EM
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (9 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis- LC
played on the GST screen.

X: Applicable
—: Not applicable EC
Self-diagnostic test Test value
SRT item Test limit Application
item TID CID FE
Three way catalyst
CATALYST 01H 01H Max. X
function
CL
EVAP control
system 05H 03H Max. X
(Small leak)
EVAP SYSTEM MT
EVAP control
system purge flow 06H 83H Min. X
monitoring AT
09H 04H Max. X
0AH 84H Min. X
Front heated
TF
0BH 04H Max. X
oxygen sensor
0CH 04H Max. X
PD
O2 SENSOR 0DH 04H Max. X
19H 86H Min. X

Rear heated 1AH 86H Min. X FA

oxygen sensor 1BH 06H Max. X
1CH 06H Max. X RA
Front heated 29H 08H Max. X
oxygen sensor
O2 SENSOR heater 2AH 88H Min. X BR
HEATER Rear heated 2DH 0AH Max. X
oxygen sensor
2EH 8AH Min. X
ST
heater
31H 8CH Min. X
32H 8CH Min. X RS
EGR function 33H 8CH Min. X
EGR SYSTEM 34H 8CH Min. X BT
35H 0CH Max. X
36H 0CH Max. X
EGRC-BPT valve HA
function 37H 8CH Min. X

EL

IDX

EC-45
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d)
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*4 Test value/
Items
CONSULT SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC *4 Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2 (GST only)

NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAIL-

P0000 0505 — — — —
URE INDICATED
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0102 — — X EC-104
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 0803 — — X EC-113
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 0401 — — X EC-120
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 0103 — — X EC-126
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 0403 — — X EC-131
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 0908 — — X EC-145
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0130 0303 X X X*3 EC-150
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0131 0411 X X X*3 EC-157
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0132 0410 X X X*3 EC-164
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0133 0409 X X X*3 EC-171
FRONT O2 SENSOR P0134 0412 X X X*3 EC-179
FR O2 SEN HEATER P0135 0901 X X X*3 EC-186
REAR O2 SENSOR P0137 0511 X X X*3 EC-190
REAR O2 SENSOR P0138 0510 X X X*3 EC-198
REAR O2 SENSOR P0139 0707 X X X*3 EC-206
REAR O2 SENSOR P0140 0512 X X X*3 EC-214
RR O2 SEN HEATER P0141 0902 X X X*3 EC-220
FUEL SYS DIAG-LEAN P0171 0115 — — X EC-224
FUEL SYS DIAG-RICH P0172 0114 — — X EC-229
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 0402 — — X EC-234
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0701 — — X EC-238
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0608 — — X EC-238
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0607 — — X EC-238
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0606 — — X EC-238
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0605 — — X EC-238
KNOCK SEN/CIRCUIT P0325 0304 — — X EC-243
CPS/CIRCUIT (OBD) P0335 0802 — — X EC-247
CAM POS SEN/CIR P0340 0101 — — X EC-252
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0302 X X X*3 EC-258
EGRC-BPT VALVE P0402 0306 X X X*3 EC-266
TW CATALYST SYSTEM P0420 0702 X X X*3 EC-271
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 0705 X X X*3 EC-276
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 1008 — — X EC-286
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 0903 — — X EC-292
EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 0704 — — X EC-297

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: These are not displayed with GST.
*4: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

EC-46
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d) GI
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*4 MA
Test value/
Items
CONSULT SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC *4 Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2 (GST only)
EM
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0104 — — X EC-303
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0205 — — X EC-308
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 0203 — — X EC-314 LC
ECM P0605 0301 — — X EC-320
MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR P1105 1302 — — X EC-322 EC
CLOSED LOOP P1148 0307 — — X EC-331
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 0201 — — X EC-333
FE
CPS/CIRC (OBD) COG P1336 0905 — — X EC-340
EGRC SOLENOID/V P1400 1005 — — X EC-345
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 0305 — — X EC-350 CL
EGR SYSTEM P1402 0514 X X X*3 EC-356
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 0213 X X X*3 EC-363 MT
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 0214 — — X EC-373
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 0215 — — X EC-381
AT
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 0111 X X X*3 EC-386
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 0309 — — X EC-392
VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 0801 — — X EC-397 TF
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 0311 — — X EC-402
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1003 — — X EC-407 PD
TOR CONV CLTCH S/V P1775 0904 — — X EC-412
TOR CONV CLTCH S/V P1776 0513 — — X EC-416
FA
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: These are not displayed with GST.
*4: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-47
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
(Cont’d)
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to erase DTC (With CONSULT)
1. If the ignition switch stays ‘‘ON’’ after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it ‘‘ON’’ (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT ‘‘ON’’ and touch ‘‘ENGINE’’.
3. Touch ‘‘SELF-DIAG RESULTS’’.
4. Touch ‘‘ERASE’’. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

SEF847U

The emission-related diagnostic information in the Note:

ECM can be erased by selecting ‘‘ERASE’’ in the ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-
‘‘SELF-DIAG RESULTS’’ mode with CONSULT. related diagnostic information will be lost
after approx. 24 hours.
How to erase DTC (With GST) ● Erasing the emission-related diagnostic
1. If the ignition switch stays ‘‘ON’’ after repair information using CONSULT or GST is easier
work, be sure to turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ once. and quicker than switching the mode selec-
Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it ‘‘ON’’ tor on the ECM.
(engine stopped) again. ● The following data are cleared when the ECM
2. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). memory is erased.
The emission-related diagnostic information in the 1. Diagnostic trouble codes
ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST 2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
(Generic Scan Tool). 3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
How to erase DTC (No Tools) 5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
1. If the ignition switch stays ‘‘ON’’ after repair
7. Others
work, be sure to turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ once.
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC
Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it ‘‘ON’’
as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC,
again.
but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II
ECM memory during work procedures.
to Mode I by turning the mode selector on the
ECM. (See EC-50.)
The emission-related diagnostic information in the
ECM can be erased by changing the diagnostic test
mode from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Mode I by
turning the mode selector on the ECM. (Refer to
EC-50.)
EC-48
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) GI

The malfunction indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition MA
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb
check.
● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to EL EM
section (‘‘WARNING LAMPS’’) or see EC-441.
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.
LC
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
SEF217U detected an engine system malfunction.
EC
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
FE
Diagnostic Test Mode I
1. BULB CHECK : This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, CL
etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit and ECM test mode
selector. (See next page.) MT
2. MALFUNCTION : This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice
WARNING in two consecutive driving cycles (2 trip detection logic), the MIL will
light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. AT
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip.
● ‘‘Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)’’
● ‘‘Closed loop control’’ TF
● Fail-safe mode

Diagnostic Test Mode II

PD
3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC : This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
RESULTS
4. FRONT HEATED OXY- : This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored FA
GEN SENSOR MONI- by front heated oxygen sensor, to be read.
TOR
MIL flashing without DTC RA
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM test
mode selector following ‘‘HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES’’ on next page.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. BR
(Refer to EC-50.)

Condition
Diagnostic Diagnostic ST
Test Mode I Test Mode II
Engine
stopped SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RS
BULB CHECK
RESULTS
Ignition switch
in ‘‘ON’’ posi- BT
tion Engine
running FRONT HEATED
MALFUNCTION
OXYGEN SENSOR HA
WARNING
MONITOR

EL

IDX

EC-49
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES
NG
Turn ignition switch Check MIL circuit. (See c Repair harness or connector.
‘‘ON’’. (Do not start c EC-441.)
engine.)
OK
.
No
Check whether ECM test c Repair or replace ECM test mode selector.
Yes mode selector can be
turned counterclockwise.

.
Mode I — MALFUNCTION INDICA- NG
c TOR LAMP CHECK. Refer to G c Diagnostic Test Mode I
— MALFUNCTION WARNING
EC-49. b
MIL should come on. c
Start engine.

OK

.
NG NG
c Check MIL circuit. (See c Repair harness or connectors.
EC-441.)
OK
OK
.
(Turn diagnostic test mode selector Check ECM fail-safe. (See
on ECM fully clockwise.) EC-81.)
MIL should come off.
OK
OK
.
Wait at least 2 seconds. b .

(Turn diagnostic test mode selector

fully counterclockwise.)

.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II
— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
c G c Diagnostic Test Mode II
— FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
MONITOR
(Erasing ECM Start engine.
memory)
. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared
when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
. 6. Test values
Wait at least 2 seconds. 7. Others
● Switching the modes is not possible when the engine is
. running.
● When ignition switch is turned off during diagnosis,
power to ECM will drop after approx. 5 seconds.
The diagnosis will automatically return to Diagnostic Test
Mode I.
● Turn back diagnostic test mode selector to the fully coun-
If the selector is turned fully terclockwise position whenever vehicle is in use.
counterclockwise at this time,
the emission-related diagnostic
information will be erased from
the backup memory in the ECM.

EC-50
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK GI
In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains
OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL section (‘‘WARNING LAMPS’’) or see EC-441.
MA
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
Condition EM
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction. LC
● These Diagnostic Trouble Code Numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
EC
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MALFUNCTION INDI-
CATOR LAMP. FE
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode 1 (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTC’s. If only one code is displayed when the
MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes CL
are displayed, they may be either DTC’s or 1st trip DTC’s. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These
unidentified codes can be identified by using the consult or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how
to read a code. MT

AT

TF

PD

SEF298Q
FA

RA

BR

ST

SEF162PA RS
Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the two LH digits of number and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates the
two RH digits of number. For example, the malfunction indicator lamp blinks 10 times for 6 seconds (0.6 sec
x 10 times) and then it blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This indicates the DTC ‘‘1003’’
BT
and refers to the malfunction of the neutral position switch.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their diagnostic trouble code numbers. The DTC
‘‘0505’’ refers to no malfunction. (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) INDEX, EC-4.) HA

EL

IDX

EC-51
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
How to erase diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode
is changed from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to ‘‘HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOS-
TIC TEST MODES’’.)
● If the battery is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost from the backup memory
after approx. 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR
In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich)
which is monitored by the front heated oxygen sensor.
Air fuel ratio feedback control
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas
condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system

*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the front heated oxygen sensor function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up
until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at
2,000 rpm under no-load.

OBD System Operation Chart

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to ‘‘Two Trip Detection Logic’’ on
EC-38.
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The ‘‘TIME’’ in ‘‘SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS’’
mode of CONSULT will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in ‘‘OK’’ for the 2nd trip.

SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns ‘‘B’’ and ‘‘C’’ under ‘‘Fuel Injection System’’ and ‘‘Misfire’’, see EC-54.
For details about patterns ‘‘A’’ and ‘‘B’’ under ‘‘Other’’, see EC-56.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

EC-52
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR GI
‘‘MISFIRE’’ <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, ‘‘FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM’’
MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

SEF392S
BT
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st
trips, MIL will light up. trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) in ECM.
without any malfunctions. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be HA
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive cleared at the moment OK is detected.
trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. EL
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once
any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) with- (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is
out the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) IDX

EC-53
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR ‘‘MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>’’, ‘‘FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM’’
<Driving pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in ‘‘OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART’’)
<Driving pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
(1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), ‘‘T’’ should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), ‘‘T’’ should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more
than 70°C (158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
● The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

EC-54
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR GI
‘‘MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>’’, ‘‘FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM’’
MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

SEF393S
BT
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st
trips, MIL will light up. trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) in ECM.
without any malfunctions. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once HA
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive (pattern B) without the same malfunction.
trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. EL
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed
any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) IDX

EC-55
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR ‘‘MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>’’, ‘‘FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM’’
<Driving pattern A>

AEC574

● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in ‘‘OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART’’).

EC-56
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONSULT GI
CONSULT INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. MA
2. Connect ‘‘CONSULT’’ to data link connector for CONSULT.
(Data link connector for CONSULT is located behind the fuse
box cover.) EM

LC
SEF321V

3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. EC

4. Touch ‘‘START’’.
FE

CL

MT
SBR455D

5. Touch ‘‘ENGINE’’. AT

TF

PD

FA
SEF895K

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service RA

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT Operation Manual.
BR
This sample shows the display when using the UE990 pro-
gram card. Screen differs in accordance with the program card
used.
ST

RS
SEF216U
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SEF374Q

EC-57
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC
RESULTS*1 CONFIRMATION
Item WORK FUNC-
DATA ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE TION
MONITOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT FRAME TEST
STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Camshaft position sensor X X X
Mass air flow sensor X X
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X X X
Front heated oxygen sensor X X X X X
Rear heated oxygen sensor X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X X X
Throttle position sensor X X X X
Tank fuel temperature sensor X X X
EVAP control system pressure sensor X X
Absolute pressure sensor X X X
EGR temperature sensor X X
INPUT Intake air temperature sensor X X
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) X
Knock sensor X
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Ignition switch (start signal) X X

Closed throttle position switch X
Closed throttle position switch (throttle
X X
position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch X
Park/neutral position switch X X X
Power steering oil pressure switch X X
Air conditioner pressure switch X
Battery voltage X
Injectors X X X
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition X X X
signal)
IACV-AAC valve X X X X X
EVAP canister purge volume control
X X X X
solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay X
Fuel pump relay X X X X
OUTPUT EGRC-solenoid valve X X X X
Front heated oxygen sensor heater X X X
Rear heated oxygen sensor heater X X X
Torque converter clutch solenoid
X X X
valve
EVAP canister vent control valve X X X
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve X X X X
MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve X X X
Calculated load value X X

X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-40.

EC-58
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
FUNCTION GI
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some MA
Work support devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs EM
Self-diagnostic results and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. LC
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT drives
Active test some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a specified range.
EC
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-
DTC confirmation
diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.

Function test
Conducted by CONSULT instead of a technician to FE
determine whether each system is ‘‘OK’’ or ‘‘NG’’.
ECM part numbers ECM part numbers can be read.
CL
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data MT
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
7. Others
AT
WORK SUPPORT MODE
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE TF
THRTL POS SEN ADJ CHECK THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL. ADJUST When adjusting throttle position sen-
IT TO THE SPECIFIED VALUE BY ROTATING THE SENSOR sor initial position
BODY UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ‘‘ON’’
PD
● ENG NOT RUNNING
● ACC PEDAL NOT PRESSED

IGNITION TIMING ADJ ● IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK CONTROL WILL BE HELD BY When adjusting initial ignition timing
FA
TOUCHING ‘‘START’’. AFTER DOING SO, ADJUST IGNITION
TIMING WITH A TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING THE CRANK-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. RA
IACV-AAC/V ADJ SET ENGINE SPEED AT THE SPECIFIED VALUE UNDER THE When adjusting idle speed
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● ENGINE WARMED UP BR
● NO-LOAD

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING ‘‘START’’ DURING When releasing fuel pressure from
IDLING. fuel line ST
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND CLOSE When detecting EVAP vapor leak
THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO point of EVAP system RS
MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CON-
DITIONS.
● BATTERY VOLTAGE IS SUFFICIENT.
● IGN SW ‘‘ON’’ BT
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
● TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). HA
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING ‘‘EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE’’
WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE ‘‘EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE’’ UNDER
THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT WILL DISCON-
EL
TINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT MAY DISPLAY
‘‘BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY’’, IDX
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.

EC-59
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
DTC and 1st trip DTC
Regarding items of ‘‘DTC and 1st trip DTC’’, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX’’ (See
EC-4.).

Freeze frame data and 1st trip freeze frame data

Freeze frame data

Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
● Engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as ‘‘PXXXX’’. [Refer to
CODE
‘‘Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC’’ (EC-4).]
[PXXXX]
● ‘‘Fuel injection system status’’ at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
‘‘MODE 2’’: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS
‘‘MODE 3’’: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
‘‘MODE 4’’: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
‘‘MODE 5’’: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
● ‘‘Short-term fuel trim’’ at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
● ‘‘Long-term fuel trim’’ at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph]
ABSOL PRESS
[kPa] or [kg/cm2] or ● The absolute pressure at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[psi]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.

EC-60
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE GI
Monitored item ECM
Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals MA
CMPSzRPM ● Indicates the engine speed computed from
(REF) [rpm] j j the REF signal (180° signal) of the cam-
shaft position sensor. EM
MAS AIR/FL SE [V]
j j ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
LC
COOLAN TEMP/S ● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ● When the engine coolant temperature
[°C] or [°F] mined by the signal voltage of the engine sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
j j coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
ant temperature determined by the EC
ECM is displayed.
FR O2 SENSOR [V]
j j ● The signal voltage of the front heated oxy-
gen sensor is displayed. FE
RR O2 SENSOR [V]
j j ● The signal voltage of the rear heated oxy-
gen sensor is displayed.
CL
FR O2 MNTR ● Display of front heated oxygen sensor sig- ● After turning ON the ignition switch,
[RICH/LEAN] nal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: ‘‘RICH’’ is displayed until air-fuel mix-
RICH ... means the mixture became ture ratio feedback control begins.

j j ‘‘rich’’, and control is being affected toward ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is MT
a leaner mixture. clamped, the value just before the
LEAN ... means the mixture became clamping is displayed continuously.
‘‘lean’’, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.
AT
RR O2 MNTR ● Display of rear heated oxygen sensor sig- ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
[RICH/LEAN] nal: value is indicated.
TF
j RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively large. PD
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph] j j ● The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.

j j
BATTERY VOLT [V] ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis- FA
played.
THRTL POS SEN [V]
j j ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage
is displayed. RA

j
TANK F/TMP SE [°C] ● The fuel temperature judged from the tank
or [°F] fuel temperature sensor signal voltage is
displayed. BR
EGR TEMP SEN [V]
j ● The signal voltage of the EGR tempera-
ture sensor is displayed.
ST
j
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] ● The intake air temperature determined by
or [°F] the signal voltage of the intake air tem-
perature sensor is indicated.
RS
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] j j ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
CLSD THL/P SW
[ON/OFF] j j ● Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF]
condition of the throttle position switch.
BT

j j
CLSD THL POS ● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
[ON/OFF] by ECM according to the throttle position HA
sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
[ON/OFF] conditioner switch as determined by the EL
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF] j j ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position switch signal. IDX
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

EC-61
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
Monitored item ECM
Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
PW/ST SIGNAL ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
[ON/OFF]
j j oil pressure switch determined by the
power steering oil pressure signal is indi-
cated.
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF] j ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
tion switch.

j
INJ PULSE [msec] ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
width compensated by ECM according to computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
B/FUEL SCHDL ● ‘‘Base fuel schedule’’ indicates the fuel
[msec]
j injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
IGN TIMING [BTDC]
j ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated.

j
IACV-AAC/V [%] ● Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
value computed by ECM according to the
input signals.
PURG VOL C/V [%] ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-

j
ume control solenoid valve computed by
the ECM according to the input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
A/F ALPHA [%] ● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
back correction factor per cycle is indi- value is indicated.
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
EVAP SYS PRES [V]
j ● The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor is displayed.
AIR COND RLY ● The air conditioner relay control condition
[ON/OFF] (determined by ECM according to the
input signal) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
[ON/OFF] dition determined by ECM according to
the input signals.
EGRC SOL/V ● The control condition of the EGRC-sole-
[ON/OFF] (Cut/flow) noid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signal) is indicated.
● ON ... EGR operation is cut-off
OFF ... EGR is operational
TCC SOL/V ● The control condition of the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
ON ... Lock-up is cancelled
OFF ... Lock-up is operational
VENT CONT/V ● The control condition of the EVAP canis-
[ON/OFF] ter vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
● ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
FR O2 HEATER ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front
[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor heater determined
by ECM according to the input signals.
RR O2 HEATER ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear
[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor heater determined
by ECM according to the input signals.
VC/V BYPASS/V ● The control condition of the vacuum cut
[ON/OFF] valve bypass valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indi-
cated.
● ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed

EC-62
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
GI
Monitored item ECM
Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● ‘‘Calculated load value’’ indicates the MA
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
ABSOL THzP/S [%] ● ‘‘Absolute throttle position sensor’’ indi- EM
cates the throttle opening computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the throttle position sensor.
●
LC
MASS AIRFLOW Indicates the mass airflow computed by
[gzm/s] ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass airflow sensor.
MAP/BARO SW/V ● The control condition of the MAP/BARO EC
[MAP/BARO] switch solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
MAP ... Intake manifold absolute pres- FE
sure
BARO ... Barometric pressure
ABSOL PRES/SE [V] ● The signal voltage of the absolute pres- CL
sure sensor is displayed.
VOLTAGE ● Voltage measured by the voltage probe.
[V] MT
PULSE ● Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle ● Only ‘‘#’’ is displayed if item is unable to
[msec] or [Hz] or [%] measured by the pulse probe. be measured.
● Figures with ‘‘#’’s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual AT
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-63
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original trouble
● Harness and connector
condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Fuel injectors
FUEL INJECTION ● Change the amount of fuel injection CHECK ITEM. ● Front heated oxygen sensor
using CONSULT.
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
IACV-AAC/V engine. Engine speed changes according to the ● Harness and connector
OPENING ● Change the IACV-AAC valve opening opening percent. ● IACV-AAC valve
percent using CONSULT.
● Engine: Return to the original trouble
● Harness and connector
ENG COOLANT condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant CHECK ITEM. ● Fuel injectors
temperature using CONSULT.
● Engine: Return to the original trouble
condition
● Timing light: Set If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Adjust initial ignition timing
IGNITION TIMING
● Retard the ignition timing using CHECK ITEM.
CONSULT.
● Engine: After warming up, idle the ● Harness and connector
engine. ● Compression
● A/C switch ‘‘OFF’’ ● Injectors
POWER BALANCE ● Shift lever ‘‘N’’ Engine runs rough or dies. ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at a ● Spark plugs
time using CONSULT. ● Ignition coils
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
● Turn the fuel pump relay ‘‘ON’’ and Fuel pump relay makes the operating ● Harness and connector
FUEL PUMP RELAY ● Fuel pump relay
‘‘OFF’’ using CONSULT and listen to sound.
operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON
EGRC SOLENOID ● Turn solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connector
VALVE with the CONSULT and listen to sound. ● Solenoid valve
operating sound.
SELF-LEARNING ● In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by touching ‘‘CLEAR’’ on
CONT the screen.
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine. ● Harness and connector
Engine speed changes according to the
PURG VOL CONT/V ● Change the EVAP canister purge ● EVAP canister purge volume control
opening percent.
volume control solenoid valve solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT.
TANK F/TEMP SEN ● Change the tank fuel temperature using CONSULT.
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
● Turn solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connector
VENT CONTROL/V ● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT and listen to sound.
operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
● Turn solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connector
VC/V BYPASS/V ● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT and listen to sound.
operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
● Turn the MAP/BARO switch solenoid MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve makes ● Harness and connector
MAP/BARO SW/V ● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
valve between ‘‘MAP’’ and ‘‘BARO’’ an operating sound.
using CONSULT and listen for
operating sound.

EC-64
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
DTC CONFIRMATION MODE GI
SRT STATUS mode
For details, refer to ‘‘SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE’’, EC-40. MA
DTC WORK SUPPORT mode
TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION REFERENCE PAGE
EM
PURGE FLOW P1447 EC-386

EVAPORATIVE
VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 EC-402 LC
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-373
SYSTEM
EVAP SML LEAK P0440 EC-276
EVAP SML LEAK P1440 EC-363 EC
FR O2 SENSOR P0130 EC-150
FR O2 SENSOR P0131 EC-157
FR O2 SENSOR
FR O2 SENSOR P0132 EC-164
FE
Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis
FR O2 SENSOR P0133 for DTC. EC-171
RR O2 SENSOR P0137 EC-190
CL
RR O2 SENSOR RR O2 SENSOR P0138 EC-198
RR O2 SENSOR P0139 EC-206
EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-258 MT
EGR SYSTEM EGRC-BPT/VLV P0402 EC-266
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-356
A/T (TCC S/V) TCC S/V FNCTN P1776 EC-416 AT

FUNCTION TEST MODE TF

FUNCTION TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Ignition switch: ON PD
SELF-DIAG (Engine stopped)
● Displays the results of on board
— Objective system
RESULTS
diagnostic system.
FA
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connector
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: ● Throttle position sensor (Closed
OFF
● Throttle position sensor circuit is tested opened throttle position)
CLOSED THROTTLE when throttle is opened and closed ● Throttle position sensor (Closed RA
POSI fully. (‘‘IDLE POSITION’’ is the test throttle position) adjustment
item name for the vehicles in which Throttle valve: ● Throttle linkage
idle is selected by throttle position ON ● Verify operation in DATA MONITOR
sensor.)
closed
mode.
BR
● Harness and connector
● Ignition switch: ON
Range (Throttle ● Throttle position sensor
THROTTLE POSI SEN
(Engine stopped)
valve fully opened More than ● Throttle position sensor adjustment
ST
● Throttle position sensor circuit is tested
CKT — Throttle valve 3.0V ● Throttle linkage
when throttle is opened and closed
fully closed) ● Verify operation in DATA MONITOR
fully.
mode. RS
● Ignition switch: ON
Out of N/P positions OFF ● Harness and connector
(Engine stopped) ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
PARK/NEUT POSI SW
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
CKT ● Linkage or park/neutral position (PNP) BT
circuit is tested when shift lever is In N/P positions ON switch adjustment
manipulated.
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connector
(Engine stopped) ● Fuel pump
HA
FUEL PUMP There is pressure pulsation on the
● Fuel pump circuit is tested by checking ● Fuel pump relay
CIRCUIT fuel feed hose.
the pulsation in fuel pressure when ● Fuel filter clogging
fuel tube is pinched. ● Fuel level EL
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
The solenoid valve makes an ● Harness and connector
EGRC SOL/V CIRCUIT ● EGRC-solenoid valve circuit is tested IDX
operating sound every 3 seconds. ● EGRC-solenoid valve
by checking solenoid valve operating
noise.

EC-65
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
FUNCTION TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Ignition switch: ON → START
● Start signal circuit is tested when
engine is started by operating the
starter. Battery voltage and engine
START SIGNAL ● Harness and connector
coolant temperature before cranking, Start signal: OFF → ON
CIRCUIT ● Ignition switch
and average battery voltage, mass air
flow sensor output voltage and
cranking speed during cranking are
displayed.
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine running) Locked position ON ● Harness and connector
PW/ST SIGNAL
● Power steering circuit is tested when ● Power steering oil pressure switch
CIRCUIT
steering wheel is rotated fully and then ● Power steering oil pump
Neutral position OFF
set to a straight line running position.
● Vehicle speed sensor circuit is tested ● Harness and connector
VEHICLE SPEED SEN Vehicle speed sensor input signal
when vehicle is running at a speed of ● Vehicle speed sensor
CKT is greater than 4 km/h (2 MPH).
10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher. ● Speedometer

● After warming up, idle the engine. ● Adjust ignition timing (by moving
● Ignition timing is checked by reading camshaft position sensor or
The timing light indicates the same
IGN TIMING ADJ ignition timing with a timing light and distributor)
value on the screen.
checking whether it agrees with ● Camshaft position sensor drive
specifications. mechanism
● INJECTION SYS (Injector, fuel
pressure regulator, harness or
connector)
● Air-fuel ratio feedback circuit (injection ● IGNITION SYS (Spark plug, power
system, ignition system, vacuum Front heated oxygen sensor transistor, ignition coil, harness or
MIXTURE RATIO TEST system, etc.) is tested by examining COUNT: More than 5 times during connector)
the front heated oxygen sensor output 10 seconds ● VACUUM SYS (Intake air leaks)
at 2,000 rpm under non-loaded state. ● Front heated oxygen sensor circuit
● Front heated oxygen sensor operation
● Fuel pressure high or low
● Mass air flow sensor
● After warming up, idle the engine.
● Injector circuit (Injector, harness or
● Injector operation of each cylinder is
connector)
stopped one after another, and Difference in engine speed is ● Ignition circuit (Spark plug, ignition coil
resultant change in engine rotation is greater than 25 rpm before and
POWER BALANCE with power transistor harness or
examined to evaluate combustion of after cutting off the injector of each
connector)
each cylinder. (This is only displayed cylinder. ● Compression
for models where a sequential
● Valve timing
multiport fuel injection system is used.)
● After warming up, idle the engine. ● Harness and connector
● IACV-AAC valve system is tested by
Difference in engine speed is ● IACV-AAC valve
IACV-AAC/V greater than 150 rpm between
detecting change in engine speed ● Air passage restriction between air
SYSTEM when valve opening is at 80% and
when IACV-AAC valve opening is inlet and IACV-AAC valve
20%. ● IAS (Idle adjusting screw) adjustment
changed to 0%, 20% and 80%.

EC-66
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (Recording vehicle data) GI
CONSULT has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching ‘‘SETTING’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode.
1. ‘‘AUTO TRIG’’ (Automatic trigger): MA
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT screen in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed at the moment the malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM. EM
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously until a malfunction is detected. However, DATA MONI-
TOR cannot continue any longer after the malfunction detection.
2. ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ (Manual trigger): LC
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT screen even
though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. EC
Use these triggers as follows:
1. ‘‘AUTO TRIG’’
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CON- FE
FIRMATION PROCEDURE’’, be sure to select to ‘‘DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)’’ mode. You can
confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT should be set in ‘‘DATA MONITOR (AUTO CL
TRIG)’’ mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’, the MT
moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI section, ‘‘Incident
Simulation Tests’’ in ‘‘HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCI-
DENT’’.) AT
2. ‘‘MANU TRIG’’
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ is selected, reset CONSULT to ‘‘MANU
TRIG’’. By selecting ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for TF
further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

SEF529Q
IDX

EC-67
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Generic Scan Tool (GST)

DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978
has 7 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name ‘‘GST’’ or ‘‘Generic Scan Tool’’ is used in this service
manual.

SEF139P

GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Connect ‘‘GST’’ to data link connector for GST. (Data link con-
nector for GST is located under LH dash panel near the fuse
box cover.)

SEF322V

3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)

SEF398S

5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.

SEF416S

EC-68
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
FUNCTION GI
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog MA
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to ‘‘Freeze Frame Data’’ (EC-60).] EM
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
MODE 3 DTCs
stored by ECM. LC
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) EC
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) FE
● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)

This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) CL
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driv-
MT
ing conditions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, following parts can be opened or closed. AT
● EVAP canister vent control valve open
● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. TF
MODE 8 — ● Low ambient temperature
● Low battery voltage
● Engine running PD
● Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’
● Low fuel temperature
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction

Introduction
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
MEF036D caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the ‘‘Work Flow’’ on EC-72.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A ‘‘Diagnostic Worksheet’’ like
the example on next page should be used.
SEF233G
Start your diagnosis by looking for ‘‘conventional’’ problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.

SEF234G

Diagnostic Worksheet
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
SEF907L come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere [for the models with
EVAP (SMALL LEAK) diagnosis].

EC-70
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction
Diagnostic Worksheet (Cont’d)
WORKSHEET SAMPLE GI
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Engine # Trans. Mileage MA
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
h Vehicle ran out of fuel causing misfire EM
Fuel and fuel filler cap
h Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on.
h Impossible to start h No combustion h Partial combustion

h Startability
h Partial combustion affected by throttle position LC
h Partial combustion NOT affected by throttle position
h Possible but hard to start h Others [ ]
h No fast idle h Unstable h High idle h Low idle EC
h Idling
h Others [ ]
Symptoms
h Stumble h Surge h Knock h Lack of power FE
h Driveability h Intake backfire h Exhaust backfire
h Others [ ]
h At the time of start h While idling CL
h Engine stall h While accelerating h While decelerating
h Just after stopping h While loading
h Just after delivery h Recently MT
Incident occurrence
h In the morning h At night h In the daytime
Frequency h All the time h Under certain conditions h Sometimes
AT
Weather conditions h Not affected
Weather h Fine h Raining h Snowing h Others [ ]
TF
Temperature h Hot h Warm h Cool h Cold h Humid °F
h Cold h During warm-up h After warm-up
PD
Engine conditions Engine speed

FA
Road conditions h In town h In suburbs h Highway h Off road (up/down)
h Not affected
h At starting h While idling h At racing RA
h While accelerating h While cruising
Driving conditions h While decelerating h While turning (RH/LH)
BR
Vehicle speed

Malfunction indicator lamp h Turned on h Not turned on ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-71
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow

Work Flow
CHECK IN

.
CHECK INCIDENT CONDITIONS. ................................................. STEP I
Listen to customer complaints. (Get symptoms.)

.
CHECK DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA. *3
...........................................
Check and PRINT OUT (write down) (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and STEP II
Freeze Frame Data (Pre-check). Then clear. Paste it in repair order sheet.
If DTC is not available even if MIL lights up, check ECM fail-safe. (Refer to EC-81.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.

Symptoms No symptoms, except MIL

collected. lights up, or (1st trip) DTC
exists at STEP II.
.
*1
Verify the symptom by driving in the condition the cus- .............................................................................................
tomer described. STEP III

Normal Code Malfunction Code

(at STEP II) (at STEP II)

. .
*1
...........................................
INCIDENT CONFIRMATION STEP IV
Verify the DTC by performing the ‘‘DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’.

.
...........................................
c Choose the appropriate action. *2 STEP V

Malfunction Code (at STEP II or IV) Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
.
BASIC INSPECTION

SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III)

.................................................................c
.
Perform inspections
according to Symptom
Matrix Chart.

. .
*4 STEP VI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.

.
REPAIR/REPLACE

.
NG
FINAL CHECK
Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION and ........................................... STEP VII
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL
FUNCTION CHECK). Then, erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTCs in
ECM.

OK
.
CHECK OUT
If completion of SRT is needed, drive the vehicle
under the specific pattern. Refer to EC-42.

*1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
*2: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ‘‘TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY’’, EC-99.
*3: If time data of ‘‘SELF-DIAG RESULTS’’ is other than ‘‘0’’ or ‘‘1t’’ refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
*4: If the malfunctioning part cannot be found, refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

EC-72
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow

Description for Work Flow GI

STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the MA
STEP I
‘‘DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET’’, EC-71.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT or Generic Scan Tool) the (1st
trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the code and the data. (Refer
EM
to EC-48.) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at
STEP II STEP III & IV.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
LC
(The ‘‘Symptom Matrix Chart’’ will be useful. See EC-82.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
EC
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET’’ and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. FE
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI section.)
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code by driving in (or performing) the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CL
CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by
using CONSULT or Generic Scan Tool.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO MT
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI section.)
In case the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ is not available, perform the AT
‘‘OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK’’ instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this sim-
plified ‘‘check’’ is an effective alternative.
The ‘‘NG’’ result of the ‘‘OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK’’ is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. TF
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V PD
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-74.) Then perform inspections
according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-82.)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
FA
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) ‘‘Harness Layouts’’.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT set in ‘‘DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)’’ mode.
RA
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
STEP VI
SULT. Refer to EC-85.
The ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short
circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to GI
BR
section (‘‘HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT’’, ‘‘Circuit Inspection’’).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
ST
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ and confirm the normal code RS
STEP VII [Diagnostic trouble code No. P0000 or 0505] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform
STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in BT
ECM. (Refer to EC-48.)

HA

EL

IDX

EC-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection

Basic Inspection
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
● Headlamp switch is OFF,
● Air conditioner switch is OFF,
● Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

BEFORE STARTING
1. Check service records for repairs of
related problems, or the current need for
SEF142I scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the follow-
ing:
● Harness connectors for proper connections
● Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper
connections
● Wiring for proper connections, pinches, or
cuts

.
CONNECT CONSULT TO THE VEHICLE.
Connect ‘‘CONSULT’’ to the data link con-
nector for CONSULT and select ‘‘ENGINE’’
from the menu. (Refer to page EC-57.)
SEF321V

.
NG
CHECK FI CAM FUNCTION c Check FI cam, refer to ‘‘Fast
1. Warm up engine to 75°C (167°F). Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 and Adjustment’’ in ‘‘BASIC
seconds then turn ignition switch SERVICE PROCEDURE’’.
‘‘ON’’.
3. Select ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ in
‘‘DATA MONITOR MODE’’ with
CONSULT.
4. Check the FI cam when the
engine coolant temperature is 75
to 85°C (167 to 185°F).
Make sure that the center of mark
SEF522P s s
A is aligned with mark B as
shown in the figure.
OR
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5
seconds then turn ignition switch
‘‘ON’’.
3. Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ WITH GST.
4. Check the FI cam when the
engine coolant temperature is 75
to 85°C (167 to 185°F).
s
Make sure that the center of A
s
is aligned with mark B as shown
in the figure.
OR
1. Disconnect engine coolant tem-
perature sensor harness connec-
SEF536H tor and check resistance as shown
in the figure.
2. Warm up engine until the resis-
tance of coolant temperature sen-
sor is 0.26 to 0.39 kV.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
4. With the resistance of the engine
coolant temperature sensor
between 0.26 to 0.39 kV, make
s
sure that the center of mark A is
s
aligned with mark B as shown in
the figure.

. OK
sA
(Go to next page.)
SEF501V

EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
s
A GI

.
CHECK IGNITION TIMING.
NG MA
c Check camshaft position
1. Warm up engine to normal oper- sensor (PHASE), crankshaft
ating temperature. position sensor (REF), and
2. Select ‘‘IGN TIMING ADJ’’ in crankshaft position sensor
‘‘WORK SUPPORT’’ mode. (POS).
EM
3. Touch ‘‘START’’.
4. Check ignition timing at idle using
timing light. LC
Ignition timing:
20°±2° BTDC
AEC880A
OR
1. Warm up engine to normal operat- EC
ing temperature.
2. Stop engine and disconnect
throttle position sensor harness
connector. FE
3. Start engine.
4. Check ignition timing at idle using
timing light.
Ignition timing: CL
20°±2° BTDC

OK
.
MT
NG
SEF265S CHECK BASE IDLE SPEED. c Adjust base idle speed by
1. Select ‘‘IGN TIMING ADJ’’ in turning idle speed adjusting
‘‘WORK SUPPORT’’ mode. screw. AT
2. When touching ‘‘START’’, does Refer to ‘‘Idle Speed/Ignition
engine speed fall to Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
M/T: 750±50 rpm Adjustment’’, in ‘‘BASIC
A/T: 750±50 rpm SERVICE PROCEDURE’’. TF
(in ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ position)?
OR
Does engine run at
M/T: 750±50 rpm PD
A/T: 750±50 rpm
(in ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ position)?

. OK FA
SEF320V
sB
(Go to next page.)
RA

BR

ST

RS
AEC881A
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
s
B

.
NG
CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION c ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH IDLE POSITION. (Check throttle Refer to ‘‘THROTTLE POSI-
position sensor idle position.) TION SENSOR IDLE POSI-
● Always check ignition timing and base TION ADJUSTMENT’’.
idle speed before performing the fol- Go to EC-78.
lowing.
1. Warm up engine to normal operating tem- OK
perature.
2. Check FI cam, refer to procedure .
3. Stop engine.
SEF577W 4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
5. Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode
with CONSULT.
6. Select ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ from
the menu.
7. Read ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal
under the following conditions.
● Insert a 0.1 mm (0.004 in) and 0.3 mm
(0.012 in) feeler gauge alternately
between the throttle adjust screw (TAS)
and throttle drum as shown in the figure
and check the signal.
‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal should remain
‘‘ON’’ while inserting 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
feeler gauge.
‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal should remain
SEF122W
‘‘OFF’’ while inserting 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
feeler gauge.
OR
4. Disconnect closed throttle position
switch harness connector.
5. Connect the tester probes to
closed throttle position switch ter-
s
minals 5 and 6 .s
6. Check harness continuity under
the following conditions.
● Insert a 0.1 mm (0.004 in) and 0.3 mm
(0.012 in) feeler gauge alternately
between the throttle adjust screw (TAS)
and throttle drum as shown in the figure
and check continuity.
AEC871A ‘‘Continuity should exist’’ while inserting
0.1 mm (0.004 in) feeler gauge.
‘‘Continuity should not exist’’ while insert-
ing 0.3 mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge.

OK
b
.
s
C
(Go to next page.)

SEF862V

EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
GI
s
C

.
● Reconnect throttle position sensor
harness connector and closed
MA
throttle position switch harness
connector.
● Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2
EM
or 3 times under no-load and then
run engine at idle speed.

LC
.
SEF864V RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
IDLE POSITION MEMORY.
Note: Always warm up engine to normal EC
operating temperature. If engine is
cool, the throttle position sensor
idle position memory will not be
reset correctly. FE
1. Start engine.
2. Warm up engine to normal operating tem-
perature.
3. Select ‘‘CLSD THL POS’’ in CL
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode
(Manual trigger) with CONSULT.
4. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.)
5. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least
MT
5 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at
least 5 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until ‘‘CLSD
AT
THL POS’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT changes to
‘‘ON’’. TF
OR
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6, 20 times.

PD
.
NG
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED. c Adjust idle speed. Refer to
Read the engine idle speed in ‘‘DATA ‘‘Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/ FA
MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. Idle Mixture Ratio Adjust-
M/T: 800±50 rpm ment’’ in ‘‘BASIC SERVICE
A/T: 800±50 rpm PROCEDURE’’.
(in ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ position) RA
OR
Check target idle speed.
M/T: 800±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm BR
(in ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ position)

OK
.
ST
ERASE DTC MEMORY.
After this inspection, unnecessary
diagnostic trouble code No. might be
stored or displayed. Erase the stored RS
memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to
‘‘How to erase DTC’’ in ‘‘ON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIP-
TION’’ and A/T section (‘‘Self- BT
diagnosis’’, ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES’’).

.
HA
INSPECTION END

EL

IDX

EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION ADJUST-
MENT
Note:
● Never adjust throttle adjust screw (TAS).
● Do not touch throttle drum when checking ‘‘CLSD THL/P
SW’’ signal or ‘‘continuity’’, doing so may cause an incor-
rect adjustment.
1. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check FI cam. Refer to procedure .
3. Stop engine.
SEF246F
4. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
5. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
6. Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
7. Select ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ from the menu.
8. Read ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal under the following
conditions.
● Insert a 0.1 mm (0.004 in) feeler gauge between throttle
adjust screw and throttle drum as shown in the figure
and check the following.
● Open throttle valve and then close.
● ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal should remain ‘‘OFF’’
when the throttle valve is closed. (If signal is ‘‘ON’’,
turn throttle position sensor body counterclock-
SEF577W
wise until the signal switches to ‘‘OFF’’.)
9. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
● Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and
stop it when ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal switches
from ‘‘OFF’’ to ‘‘ON’’, then tighten sensor body fix-
ing bolts.
10. Make sure the signal is ‘‘ON’’ when the throttle valve is
closed and ‘‘OFF’’ when it is opened. Repeat it 2 or 3
times.
11. Remove 0.1 mm (0.004 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.3
mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge and check the following.
Make sure the signal remains ‘‘OFF’’ when the throttle
SEF122W valve is closed. Repeat it 2 or 3 times.
12. Tighten throttle position sensor.
Check that the ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ signal remains
‘‘OFF’’ while closing throttle valve. If NG, repeat from
step 4.
After this adjustment, go to procedure RESET
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
MEMORY.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Disconnect closed throttle position sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Connector tester probes to closed throttle position
AEC871A switch terminals s 5 and s 6 and check continuity under
the following conditions.
● Insert a 0.1 mm (0.004 in) feeler gauge between the
throttle adjust screw and throttle drum as shown in the
figure and check the following.
● Open throttle valve then close.
● Continuity should not exist while closing the
throttle valve. If continuity exists, turn throttle posi-
tion sensor body counterclockwise until continuity
does not exist.
7. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
● Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and
AEC872A
stop it when continuity comes to exist, then tighten
sensor body fixing bolts.
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
8. Make sure continuity exists when the throttle valve is GI
closed and continuity does not exist when it is opened.
Repeat it 2 or 3 times.
9. Remove 0.1 mm (0.004 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.3 MA
mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge and check the following.
Make sure continuity does not exist when the throttle
valve is closed. Repeat it 2 or 3 times. EM
10. Tighten throttle position sensor.
Check that continuity does not exist while closing the
throttle valve. If NG, repeat from step 5. LC
After this adjustment, go to procedure RESET
SEF862V
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
MEMORY. EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-79
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Inspection

Priority Chart
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● P0100 Mass air flow sensor (0102)
● P0110 Intake air temperature sensor (0401)
● P0115, P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor (0103), (0908)
● P0120 Throttle position sensor (0403)
● P0180 Tank fuel temperature sensor (0402)
● P0325 Knock sensor (0304)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (0101)
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor (0104)
● P0605 ECM (0301)
● P1320 Ignition signal (0201)
● P1400 EGRC-solenoid valve (1005)
● P1706 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (1003)
2 ● P0105 Absolute pressure sensor (0803)
● P0130-P0134 Front heated oxygen sensor (0303-0412)
● P0135 Front heated oxygen sensor heater (0901)
● P0137-P0140 Rear heated oxygen sensor (0510-0707)
● P0141 Rear heated oxygen sensor heater (0902)
● P0335, P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) (0802), (0905)
● P0443, P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1008), (0214)
● P0446, P1446, P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve (0903), (0215), (0309)
● P0450 EVAP control system pressure sensor (0704)
● P0510 Closed throttle position switch (0203)
● P1105 MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve (1302)
● P1401 EGR temperature sensor (0305)
● P1447 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring (0111)
● P1490, P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve (0801), (0311)
● P1775, P1776 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (0904), (0513)
3 ● P0171, P0172 Fuel injection system function (0115), (0114)
● P0304 - P0300 Misfire (0605 - 0701)
● P0400, P1402 EGR function (0302), (0514)
● P0402 EGRC-BPT valve function (0306)
● P0420 Three way catalyst function (0702)
● P0440, P1440 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK) (0705), (0213)
● P0505 IACV-AAC valve (0205)
● P1148 Closed loop control (0307)

EC-80
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

Fail-Safe Chart GI
The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates. MA
DTC No.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
CONSULT ECM*1
GST
EM
P0100 0102 Mass air flow sensor cir- Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
cuit LC
P0115 0103 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time
ture sensor circuit after turning ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’.
CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. EC
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT display) FE
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or
40°C (104°F)
Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after igni-
80°C (176°F)
CL
tion ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time) MT
P0120 0403 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
circuit engine speed. AT
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.

Condition Driving condition TF

When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
PD
Unable to Unable to ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
access access The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning. FA
ECM Diagnostic When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction
Test Mode condition in the CPU of ECM), the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the
II instrument panel lights to warn the driver. RA
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump
BR
operation, and IACV-AAC valve operation are controlled under certain limita-
tions.
ST
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm.
Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system RS
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve.
Fuel pump relay is ‘‘ON’’ when engine is running and ‘‘OFF’’
Fuel pump
when engine stalls.
BT
IACV-AAC valve Full open

Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed. HA

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
EL

IDX

EC-81
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

Symptom Matrix Chart

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SYSTEM

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Basic engine control system Reference page

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-429
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-29
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-423
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-23
Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-28
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-74
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-308
IACV-FICD solenoid valve circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-437
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-74
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-333
EGR EGRC-solenoid valve circuit 2 2 3 3 3 EC-345
EC-258, 266,
EGR system 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
356
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 EC-99
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page)

EC-82
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
GI
SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
MA

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

EM

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SYSTEM

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine control system Reference page

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

LC

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
EC

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA FE

Engine Camshaft position sensor circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-252
control Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-104
Front heated oxygen sensor circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-150, 157 CL
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-126, 145
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-131
Incorrect throttle position sensor adjust-
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-74 MT
ment
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-303
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-243
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-320, 81
AT
Start signal circuit 2 EC-426
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-407
Power steering oil pressure switch circuit 2 3 3 EC-434 TF
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page)

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-83
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SYSTEM

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine mechanical & other Reference page

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank FE section
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
octane) —
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle body) 5 5 5 5 5 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire 5 5 5 5 FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
—
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit EL section
Starter circuit 3
Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 4 AT section
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
EM section
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain
mechanism Camshaft
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/Gasket
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil MA, EM, LC
gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 section
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat 5
LC section
Water pump
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery
Cooling fan 5
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant MA section

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

EC-84
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor GI

Mode
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
MA
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data
EM
in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the
ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
● If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow LC
sensor, first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Tachometer: Connect Almost the same speed as the CON-
EC
CMPSzRPM (REF)
● Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT value. SULT value.
● Engine: After warming up
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
Idle 0.9 - 1.8V FE
MAS AIR/FL SE
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load 2,500 rpm 1.9 - 2.3V

COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)

CL
FR O2 SENSOR 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ↔ RICH MT
FR O2 MNTR Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
RR O2 SENSOR Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V AT
● Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR quickly LEAN ↔ RICH
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
value the CONSULT value TF
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Engine: After warming up
● Ignition switch: ON
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.2 - 0.8V PD
THRTL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.5V

EGR TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

FA
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
● Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: Idle position ON
CLSD THL/P SW ● Ignition switch: ON RA
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
● Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: Idle position ON
CLSD THL POS ● Ignition switch: ON BR
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF

Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’ OFF

● Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG
engine Air conditioner switch: ‘‘ON’’
ST
ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON RS
Except above OFF
Steering wheel in neutral position
● Engine: After warming up, idle the OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine
(forward direction) BT
The steering wheel is fully turned ON

HA

EL

IDX

EC-85
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up
Idle 2.5 - 3.3 msec
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
INJ PULSE
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,000 rpm 2.4 - 3.2 msec
No-load
● Engine: After warming up
Idle 0.8 - 1.2 msec
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
B/FUEL SCHDL
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.2 msec
No-load
● Engine: After warming up
Idle Approx. 20° BTDC
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
IGN TIMING
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
No-load
● Engine: After warming up
Idle Approx. 30%
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
IACV-AAC/V
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,000 rpm —
No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V ● Air conditioner switch ‘‘OFF’’ 2,000 rpm (More than 200 seconds after
● No-load —
starting engine)
A/F ALPHA ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 50 - 159%
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V
AIR COND RLY ● Air conditioner switch: OFF → ON OFF → ON
● Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
● Engine running and cranking
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
Except as shown above OFF
● Engine: After warming up Idle ON (Cut)
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
EGRC SOL/V Engine speed: Revving engine from idle
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’ OFF (Flow)
● No-load to 3,000 rpm quickly
Idle ON
TCC SOL/V ● Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm OFF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF
● Engine speed: Below 3,000 rpm (All models)
For 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm (4WD ON
models only)
FR O2 HEATER
● Engine speed: Above 3,000 rpm (2WD models)
More than 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm OFF
(4WD models)
● Engine speed: Idle after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more ON
RR O2 HEATER
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) OFF
VC/V BYPASS/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF
● Engine: After warming up
Idle 9.5 - 34.0%
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
CAL/LD VALUE
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,500 rpm 13.9 - 24.9%
No-load
● Engine: After warming up, engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0%
ABSOL THzP/S stopped
● Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80%
● Engine: After warming up
Idle 0.9 - 5.8 gzm/s
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
MASS AIRFLOW
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● 2,500 rpm 7.5 - 13.2 gzm/s
No-load
● Engine: For 5 seconds after starting engine BARO
MAP/BARO SW/V ● Ignition switch: More than 5 seconds after turning ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
● Engine: More than 5 seconds after starting engine
MAP

● Ignition switch: ON
● Engine: For 5 seconds after starting engine
Approx. 4.4V
ABSOL PRES/SE
● Engine: More than 5 seconds after starting engine (After warming up) Approx. 1.2V

EC-86
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor GI

Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode. MA
(Select ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ with CONSULT.)

THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL THzP/S, CLSD THL/P SW EM

Below is the data for ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’, ‘‘ABSOL THzP/S’’ and ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ when depressing the
accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
The signal of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’ and ‘‘ABSOL THzP/S’’ should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or LC
rise after ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ is changed from ‘‘ON’’ to ‘‘OFF’’.

EC

FE

CL

SEF058P
MT

CMPSzRPM (REF), MAS AIR/FL SE, THRTL POS SEN, RR O2 SEN, FR O2 SEN, INJ PULSE
AT
Below is the data for ‘‘CMPSzRPM (REF)’’, ‘‘MAS AIR/FL SE’’, ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’, ‘‘RR O2 SEN’’, ‘‘FR O2
SEN’’ and ‘‘INJ PULSE’’ when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine
to normal operating temperature. TF
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL
SEF059P

IDX

EC-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode (Cont’d)

SEF417R

EC-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description

ECM Terminals and Reference Value GI

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the instrument lower cover. For this MA
inspection:
● Remove instrument lower cover.
EM

LC
SEF324V

2. Remove ECM harness protector. EC

FE

CL

MT
AEC913

3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con- AT

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
● Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. TF
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS
SEF367I ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SEF533P

EC-89
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

0 - 0.5V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

SEF186T
1 PU/W Ignition signal
0.2 - 1.0V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF187T

12 - 14V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

SEF188T
2 B Ignition check
12 - 13V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF189T

0 - 1V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

SEF190T
3 P/L Tachometer
0.5 - 2V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF191T

EC-90
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
MA
Engine is running.

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’

0 - 1V EM
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
4 LG/R ECCS relay (Self-shutoff) ‘‘OFF’’
LC
Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’
BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ‘‘OFF’’ EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) FE
Engine is running.
CL
Idle speed

EVAP canister purge vol- MT

5 R/Y ume control solenoid SEF109V
valve 12 - 13V
AT
Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. (More than 200 TF

seconds after starting engine)

PD
SEF110V

Engine is running.
10 B/R ECM ground Engine ground FA
Idle speed

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

RA
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1V
‘‘ON’’
11 W/R Fuel pump relay Engine is running. BR
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than 5 seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) ST
switch ‘‘ON’’

Engine is running.
Approximately 0V RS
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ‘‘ON’’*
12 P Air conditioner relay
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
BT
A/C switch is ‘‘OFF’’. (11 - 14V)

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ 0 - 1V

HA
18 R/W Malfunction indicator lamp Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
EL
Engine is running.
19 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed IDX
*: Any mode except ‘‘OFF’’, ambient air temperature above 10°C (50°F).

EC-91
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 0V

20 L/OR Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch ‘‘START’’
(11 - 14V)

Engine is running.

Both air conditioner switch and blower switch Approximately 0V

Air conditioner dual-pres- are ‘‘ON’’ (Compressor operates)
21 G/R
sure switch
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Air conditioner switch is ‘‘OFF’’. (11 - 14V)

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

Approximately 0V
Park/neutral position Gear position is ‘‘N’’ or ‘‘P’’.
22 L/B
(PNP) switch Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
Approximately 5V
Except the above gear position

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ (Warm-up condition)

0.2 - 0.8V
Accelerator pedal fully released
23 L Throttle position sensor
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
3.5 - 4.5V
Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0V

24 W/G Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
(11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
25 B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE

Accelerator pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
Throttle position switch
28 BR/W
(Closed position) Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
Approximately 0V
Accelerator pedal depressed

1 - 4V

Engine is running.

29 G/B Vehicle speed sensor Lift up the vehicle.

In 2nd gear position
40 km/h (25 MPH)

SEF111V

Engine ground
Engine is running. (Probe this terminal with
32 B/Y ECM ground
Idle speed @ tester probe when
measuring.)

Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pres- Steering wheel is fully turned.
39 GY/R
sure switch Engine is running.
Approximately 5V
Steering wheel is not turned.

EC-92
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
MA
42 BR Sensors’ power supply Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 5V

Engine is running.
43 B/W Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V
EM
Idle speed

0.2 - 0.5V LC

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

44 PU EC
Idle speed

FE
Camshaft position sensor SEF114V
(Reference signal) 0 - 0.5V
CL

Engine is running.
48 PU MT
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

AT
SEF200T

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

TF
Engine is not running.
Approximately 4.4V
Engine is running.
45 B/R Absolute pressure sensor PD
For 5 seconds after starting engine

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Approximately 1.2V
More than 5 seconds after starting engine FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-93
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Approximately 0V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

Crankshaft position sensor SEF112V

47 L
(OBD) Approximately 0V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF113V

Approximately 2.6V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

Camshaft position sensor SEF195T

49 LG
(Position signal) Approximately 2.5 - 2.6V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF196T

0 - Approximately 1.0V

Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B After warming up to normal operating tempera-
sor
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF201T

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

0.9 - 1.8V
Idle speed
54 R Mass air flow sensor
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
1.8 - 2.3V
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

Mass air flow sensor Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

55 G Approximately 0V
ground Idle speed

EC-94
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
MA
Engine is running.
Rear heated oxygen sen- After warming up to normal operating tempera-
56 OR
sor
0 - Approximately 1.0V EM
ture and revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly

Approximately 0 - 4.8V LC
Engine coolant tempera- Output voltage varies with
59 LG/R Engine is running.
ture sensor engine coolant tempera-
ture. EC
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Tank fuel temperature
60 Y/B Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
sensor FE
fuel temperature.

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
61 PU/R Engine is running. Output voltage varies with CL
sensor
intake air temperature.

EVAP control system

62 Y Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 3.4V MT
pressure sensor

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Less than 4.5V AT
Idle speed
63 G/OR EGR temperature sensor
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
0 - 1.5V TF
EGR system is operating.

Engine is running.
64 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.4V PD
Idle speed

67 B/P BATTERY VOLTAGE

Power supply for ECM Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
(11 - 14V)
FA
72 B/P

Data link connector for Engine is running.

69 LG/R 0.2 - 14V RA
GST Idle speed (GST is disconnected.)

75 Y/R Engine is running. 0 - 4V

Data link connector for BR
CONSULT Idle speed (CONSULT is connected and
76 GY/L turned on.) 3 - 10V

BATTERY VOLTAGE ST
80 SB Power supply (Back-up) Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’
(11 - 14V)

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-95
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

10.5 - 11.5V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

SEF645U
101 OR/L IACV-AAC valve
1 - 13V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF646U

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
102 W/B Injector No. 1

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

104 W/R Injector No. 3

SEF204T

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
109 W/L Injector No. 2

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

111 W/PU Injector No. 4

SEF205T

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

0 - 1V
Idle speed
103 G/W EGRC-solenoid valve
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly (11 - 14V)

EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE

108 R/G Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
trol valve (11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
Approximately 1V
Torque converter clutch Idle speed
115 L/Y solenoid valve (A/T mod-
els only) Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. (11 - 14V)

EC-96
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
MA
Engine is running.
116 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed EM
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 B/P Current return
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
LC
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch EC

‘‘ON’’
0 - 1V
Engine is running.

Idle speed FE
MAP/BARO switch sole- For 5 seconds after starting engine
118 LG/B
noid valve Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
CL
More than 5 seconds after turning ignition
switch ‘‘ON’’ BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine is running. (11 - 14V) MT
Idle speed
More than 5 seconds after starting engine
AT
Engine is running.

Engine speed is below 3,000 rpm. (All models) Approximately 0.4V

For 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds TF
3,000 rpm (4WD models only)
Front heated oxygen sen-
119 BR/Y Engine is running. PD
sor heater
Engine speed is above 3,000 rpm. (2WD mod- BATTERY VOLTAGE
els) (11 - 14V)
More than 6 seconds after engine speed
FA
exceeds 3,000 rpm (4WD models)

120 P/B
Vacuum cut valve bypass
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
BATTERY VOLTAGE RA
valve (11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
BR
Idle speed after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h Approximately 0.4V
Rear heated oxygen sen- (43 MPH) or more
122 R/B
sor heater ST
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine is not running. (11 - 14V)
RS
Engine is running.
124 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-97
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on DTC (1st trip) visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area.

Common I/I Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than ‘‘0’’ or ‘‘1t’’.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC data does not appear during the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
VI The TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.

Diagnostic Procedure
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to ‘‘HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED INFORMATION’’ (EC-48).

.
Check ground terminals. Refer to ‘‘Circuit Inspection’’, ‘‘GROUND INSPECTION’’ (GI section).

.
Perform ‘‘Incident Simulation Tests’’ (GI section).

.
Check connector terminals. Refer to ‘‘How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal’’ (GI section).

EC-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC518A

EC-99
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
(Cont’d)
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0 - 1V

For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
4 LG/R ECCS relay (Self-shutoff) ‘‘OFF’’

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’

BATTERY VOLTAGE
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ‘‘OFF’’

Engine is running.
10 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

Engine is running.
19 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0V

24 W/G Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
(11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
25 B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

Engine ground
Engine is running. (Probe this terminal with
32 B/Y ECM ground
Idle speed @ tester probe when
measuring.)

67 B/P BATTERY VOLTAGE

Power supply for ECM Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
72 B/P (11 - 14V)

BATTERY VOLTAGE
80 SB Power supply (Back-up) Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’
(11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
116 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE

117 B/P Current return
Idle speed (11 - 14V)

Engine is running.
124 B/R ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed

EC-100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
(Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
Yes EM
Start engine. Go to ‘‘CHECK
c
Is engine running? POWER SUPPLY-III’’ on
next page.
No
.
LC
NG
SEF600P CHECK POWER SUPPLY-I. Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ● Harness connectors
EC
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal ssM65 , E43
s 24 and ground with CONSULT or ● Harness connectors
tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
ssM59 , F27
● 10A fuse FE
● Harness for open or
OK short between ECM and
ignition switch CL
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.

. MT
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-I. Repair open circuit, short
SEF119V c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors. AT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
sssss
terminals 10 , 19 , 25 , 32 , 116 ,
s 124 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
TF
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
PD
OK
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II.
c
Check the following. FA
1. Disconnect ECCS relay. ● 10A fuse
SEF323V 2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
s
3. Check voltage between terminals 2 , ssM59 , F27
RA
s 5 and ground with CONSULT or ● Harness for open or
tester. short between ECCS
Voltage: Battery voltage relay and battery
If NG, repair harness or BR
OK connectors.

.
NG ST
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s
terminal 4 and terminal 1 .s RS
Continuity should exist.
SEF120V
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power. BT
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR HA
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. EL
INSPECTION END

IDX
SEF605P

EC-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
(Cont’d)

CHECK POWER SUPPLY-III. NG Check the following.

c
Check voltage between ECM terminals ● Harness connectors

s
80 and ground with CONSULT or tester.
ssF27 , M59
Voltage: Battery voltage ● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or
OK
short between ECM and
battery
If NG, repair harness or
MEC698B connectors.

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-IV. OK Go to ‘‘CHECK
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and then GROUND CIRCUIT-II’’ on
‘‘OFF’’. next page.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals
sss
67 , 72 , 117 and ground with CON-

SULT or tester.
Voltage: Case-1: Battery voltage does
After turning ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, not exist.
battery voltage will exist for a few Case-2: Battery voltage exists
SEF121V
seconds, then drop to approximately for more than a few
0V. seconds.
NG

Case-2 Go to ‘‘CHECK ECCS

Case-1 c
RELAY’’ on next page.

.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY NG If NG, repair open circuit or
c
BETWEEN ECCS RELAY AND ECM. short to ground or short to
SEF122V 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. power in harness or con-
2. Disconnect ECCS relay. nectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
sss
terminals 67 , 72 , 117 and relay ter-
s
minal 3 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK

.
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECCS NG Check the following.
c
SEF323V RELAY AND GROUND. ● Harness connectors
Check voltage between relay terminals ssF27 , M59
ss
2 , 5 and ground with CONSULT or ● 10A fuse
tester. ● Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between ECCS
relay and battery
OK
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
.

s
B
(Go to next page.)

SEF120V

EC-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
(Cont’d) GI
s
B

MA
.
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c EM
Check harness continuity between ECM to ground or short to power
s s
terminal 4 and relay terminal 1 . in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
LC
If OK, check harness for short to ground
SEF605P and short to power.

OK EC

.
CHECK ECCS RELAY. NG Replace ECCS relay.
FE
c
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay
s s
terminals 1 and 2 .
CL
2. Check continuity between relay termi-
s s
nals 3 and 5 .
s s
12V ( 1 - 2 ) applied:
MT
Continuity exists.
SEF123V
No voltage applied:
No continuity
AT
OK

. TF
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-II. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
Check harness continuity between ECM to ground or short to power
ssssss
terminals 10 , 19 , 25 , 32 , 116 , 124 in harness or connectors. PD
and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power. FA
SEF119V OK
. RA
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
BR
.
INSPECTION END
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-103
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100

Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
SEF893J the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up
Idle 0.9 - 1.8V
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
MAS AIR/FL SE
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load
2,500 rpm 1.9 - 2.3V

● Engine: After warming up

Idle 9.5 - 34.0%
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
CAL/LD VALUE
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load
2,500 rpm 13.9 - 24.9%

● Engine: After warming up

Idle 0.9 - 5.8 gzm/s
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
MASS AIRFLOW
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load
2,500 rpm 7.5 - 13.2 gzm/s

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

0.9 - 1.8V
Idle speed
54 R Mass air flow sensor
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
1.9 - 2.3V
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

Mass air flow sensor Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

55 G Approximately 0V
ground Idle speed

EC-104
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC GI
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ... MA
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P0100 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent ● Harness or connectors
0102 to ECM when engine is not running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EM
........................................................................................... ● Mass air flow sensor
C) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under
light load driving condition. LC
B) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ● Harness or connectors
ECM* when engine is running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
........................................................................................... ● Intake air leaks EC
D) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under ● Mass air flow sensor
heavy load driving condition.
FE
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe
Detected items
mode CL
Engine speed will not rise more than
Mass air flow sensor circuit
2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AT

Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform ‘‘Proce-
dure for malfunction B’’. If there is no problem on ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’, perform ‘‘Procedure
for malfunction C’’. If there is no problem on ‘‘Procedure for malfunction C’’, perform ‘‘Procedure for TF
malfunction D’’.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. PD
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. FA

Procedure for malfunction A RA

1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. BR
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109. ST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’, and wait at least 6 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. RS
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
SEF232U PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BT
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’, and wait at least 6 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
HA
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
EL

IDX

EC-105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction B
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
3) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
SEF712T 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
4) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is confirmed after more than 5 seconds, there
may be malfunction C.
Procedure for malfunction C
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon after starting, wait at least
10 seconds with engine stopped. (Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
instead of running engine at idle speed.)
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
4) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
SEF715T 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
3) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
4) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.

EC-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction D GI
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. MA
If engine cannot be started, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
3) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. EM
4) Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with ‘‘DATA
MONITOR’’.
5) Increase engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. LC
6) Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine
speed increases.
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-109. EC
If OK, go to following step.
7) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds. FE
CMPSzRPM (REF): More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL POS SEN: More than 3V
Selector lever: Suitable position CL
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
engine load) will help maintain the
driving conditions required for MT
this test.
SEF998N
8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-109. AT

TF

PD

FA
SEF231U

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RA
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow BR
sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be con-
firmed.
Procedure for malfunction D ST
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
RS
SEF534P
3) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
4) Check the mass air flow with ‘‘MODE 1’’.
5) Check for linear mass air flow rise in response to BT
increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
6)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HA
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. EL
3) Check the voltage between ECM terminal s 54 and
ground.
4) Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to IDX
about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF535P
5)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-109.
EC-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)

AEC519A

EC-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
If the trouble is duplicated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A
or C’’, perform ‘‘Procedure A’’ below. If the trouble is dupli-
cated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B or D’’, perform ‘‘Pro- MA
cedure B’’ on next page.
Procedure A EM
INSPECTION START
LC
.
SEF325V
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground EC
screws.

FE
.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
c
● Harness for open or
CL
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor har-
ness connector. short between ECCS
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. relay and mass air flow
MT
3. Check voltage between terminal 2 s sensor
AEC131A and ground with CONSULT or tester. ● Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between mass air
flow sensor and ECM
AT
OK
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
TF
.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short PD
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ter- FA
SEF126V
s
minal 3 and ECM terminal 55 . s
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to RA
ground and short to power.

OK
BR
.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
Check harness continuity between termi-
c
to ground or short to power
ST
s
nal 4 and ECM terminal 54 . s in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
RS
SEF124V OK
. BT
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace mass air flow sen-
c
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, HA
EC-112.

OK
. EL
s
A
(Go to next page.)
IDX
SEF125V

EC-109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

Procedure B
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM. NG Reconnect the parts.
c
Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Air cleaner
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to
SEF325V collector
If disconnected, reconnect the parts.

OK
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
c
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor har- ● Harness for open or
AEC131A
ness connector. short between ECCS
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. relay and mass air flow
3. Check voltage between terminal 2s sensor
and ground with CONSULT or tester. ● Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between mass air
flow sensor and ECM
OK If NG, repair harness or
connectors.

s
A
(Go to next page.)
SEF126V

EC-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
GI
s
A

. MA
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors. EM
3. Check harness continuity between ter-
s
minal 3 and ECM terminal 55 . s LC
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
SEF124V
ground and short to power.
EC
OK

.
NG
FE
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
Check harness continuity between termi- to ground or short to power
s
nal 4 and ECM terminal 54 . s in harness or connectors. CL
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.
MT
OK
SEF125V
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace mass air flow sen- AT
c
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page. TF
OK
PD
.
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
FA
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2
RA
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
BR
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.
ST
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR RS
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
BT
INSPECTION END

HA

EL

IDX

EC-111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Mass air flow sensor
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between terminal s 54 and ground.

Conditions Voltage V
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ (Engine stopped.) Less than 1.0
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating tem-
SEF326V 0.9 - 1.8
perature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operat-
1.9 - 2.3
ing temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.3 - 1.7 to Approx. 3
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm
in engine speed.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow
sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above
check.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot
wire for damage or dust.
SEF893J

EC-112
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105

Absolute Pressure Sensor GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO MA
switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient baro-
metric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the volt-
age signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage EM
rises.

LC
SEF327V

EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF946S

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC AT

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause) TF
P0105 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sen- ● Harness or connectors
0803 sor is sent to ECM. (Absolute pressure sensor circuit is open or
shorted.) PD
● Absolute pressure sensor

B) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Hoses

under light load driving conditions. (Hoses between the intake manifold and absolute
FA
pressure sensor are disconnected or clogged.)
● Intake air leaks
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve RA
● Absolute pressure sensor

C) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Absolute pressure sensor BR
under heavy load driving conditions.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION ST

PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’. RS
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on ‘‘Procedure for malfunc-
tion B’’, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction C’’.
NOTE:
BT
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting HA
the next test.
EL

IDX

EC-113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction A
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 6 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
SEF232U --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 6 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.

Procedure for malfunction B

1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and let it idle.
5) Wait at least 10 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
SEF712T --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine.
4) Let engine idle and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine.
4) Let engine idle and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
6) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.

EC-114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction C GI
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
MA
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
The voltage of ‘‘ABSOL PRES/SE’’ should be more than EM
1.74 [V].
If the check result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
LC
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SEF127V 3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
EC
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
6) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
7) Drive the vehicle at least 3 consecutive seconds under FE
the following conditions,
B/FUEL SCHDL: More than 4 msec
CMPSzRPM (REF): 3,000 - 4,800 rpm CL
Selector lever: Suitable position
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
engine load) will help maintain MT
the driving conditions required
for this test.
8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
TF

PD

FA

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RA
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated BR
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
ST
Procedure for malfunction C
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘MAP’’ in ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST. RS
3) Make sure that the pressure of ‘‘MAP’’ is more than 46
SEF518R kPa (0.47 kg/cm2, 6.7 psi).
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-117. BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Make sure that the voltage between ECM terminal s 45 HA
and ground is more than 1.74 [V].
3)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-117.
EL

IDX
SEF128V

EC-115
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)

AEC520A

EC-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
If the trouble is duplicated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A
or C’’, perform ‘‘Procedure A’’ below. If the trouble is dupli-
cated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’, perform ‘‘Proce- MA
dure B’’ on next page.
Procedure A EM
INSPECTION START
LC
.
SEF328V
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground EC
screws.

OK
FE
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c Repair harness or connec-
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. tors.
2. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor
CL
harness connector.
3. Check sensor connector for water.
Water should not exist. MT
If OK, go to step 4. If NG, repair or
SEF325V replace harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
5. Check voltage between terminal 3s AT
and engine ground with CONSULT or
tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
TF
OK

.
NG PD
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 1 and engine ground. FA
Continuity should exist.
SEF095S If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
RA
OK

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
Repair open circuit, short
BR
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 45 and terminal 2 . ST
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
RS
OK
SEF096S .
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace absolute pressure
(Absolute pressure sensor).
c
sensor.
BT
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-119.
HA
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. EL

.
INSPECTION END
IDX
SEF129V

EC-117
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure B
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE TO ABSO- NG CHECK VACUUM HOSE.
c
LUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. Check vacuum hose for
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal clogging, cracks, discon-
operating temperature. nection or improper con-
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. nection.
SEF385U 3. Connect MAP/BARO switch solenoid If NG, repair or replace the
valve and absolute pressure sensor hose.
with a rubber tube that has vacuum
gauge. OK
.
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
Check vacuum port for
5. Select ‘‘MAP/BARO SW/V’’ in
clogging.
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with
If NG, clean it.
CONSULT.
6. Start engine and let it idle. OK
7. Touch ‘‘MAP’’ and ‘‘BARO’’ alter- .
nately and check for vacuum. CHECK COMPONENT
(MAP/BARO switch sole-
MAP/BARO
Vacuum noid valve).
SW/V
SEF130V Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
BARO Should not exist INSPECTION’’ of
MAP Should exist
‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR DTC P1105’’,
EC-330.
OR
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. OK NG
5. Start engine and check for .
vacuum. Replace
For 5 seconds after starting MAP/BARO
engine: switch sole-
Vacuum should not exist. noid valve.
6. More than 5 seconds after start-
ing engine. .

SEF131V Vacuum should exist. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.

Check intake system for air
OK leaks.

.
NG
CHECK HOSE BETWEEN ABSOLUTE Repair or reconnect hose.
c
PRESSURE SENSOR AND MAP/BARO
SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Check hose for clogging, cracks, dis-
connection or improper connection.

OK
.
SEF109L NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace absolute pressure
c
(Absolute pressure sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-118
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
Absolute pressure sensor
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector MA
connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and check output voltage between EM
ECM terminal s 45 and engine ground.
The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum of −26.7 kPa (−200 mmHg, −7.87 LC
inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and
SEF132V
check the output voltage.
The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value EC
measured in step 3.
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. FE
● Do not apply vacuum below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg,
−27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92
inHg). CL
5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor.

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-119
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.

SEF329V

<Reference data>
Intake air temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kV
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
s
61 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 32 (ECM ground). s

SEF012P

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0110 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0401 sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
........................................................................................... ● Intake air temperature sensor
B) Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine
coolant temperature sensor.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If DTC cannot be
confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.

Procedure for malfunction A

1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-124.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Select MODE 7 with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
SEF232U PROCEDURE’’, EC-124.

EC-120
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GI
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. MA
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC EM
PROCEDURE’’, EC-124.

LC

Procedure for malfunction B EC

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
FE
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be CL
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F). MT
(a) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
SEF233U (b) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
(c) Check the engine coolant temperature. AT
(d) If the engine coolant temperature is above 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and cool down
engine. TF
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tem-
perature is above 90°C (194°F).
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. PD
3) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Start engine.
5) Hold vehicle speed more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for FA
100 consecutive seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-124. RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F). BR
(a) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
(b) Select MODE 1 with GST.
(c) Check the engine coolant temperature. ST
(d) If the engine coolant temperature is above 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and cool down
engine.
RS
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tem-
SEF950N
perature is above 90°C (194°F).
2) Start engine.
3) Hold vehicle speed more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for
BT
100 consecutive seconds.
4) Select MODE 7 with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC HA
PROCEDURE’’, EC-124.
EL

IDX

EC-121
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
(a) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
(b) Check voltage between ECM terminal s 59 and
ground.
Voltage: More than 1.0 (V)
(c) If the voltage is below 1.0 (V), turn ignition switch
‘‘OFF’’ and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before the voltage is below
1.0V.
SEF397Q
2) Start engine.
3) Hold vehicle speed more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for
100 consecutive seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
5) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-124.

EC-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC521A

EC-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. tors.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sen-
sor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
s
SEF329V
4. Check voltage between terminal 1
and ground.
Voltage:
Approximately 5V

OK

.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
AEC570A
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace intake air tem-
c
(Intake air temperature sensor). perature sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
SEF102S
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-124
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
Intake air temperature sensor
Check resistance as shown in the figure. MA

EM

LC
SEF135V

<Reference data> EC
Intake air temperature
Resistance kV
°C (°F) FE
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38
CL
If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor.

MT
SEF012P

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-125
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)

(Circuit)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K

<Reference data>
Engine coolant tempera-
Voltage* Resistance
ture
V kV
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260

SEF012P *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
s
59 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 32 (ECM s
ground).

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0115 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0103 sent to ECM.* (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Engine coolant temperature sensor

*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
turning ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’.
CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Engine coolant temperature decided

Condition
(CONSULT display)

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or

40°C (104°F)
Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after igni-
80°C (176°F)
tion ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)

EC-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
(Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition EM
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. LC
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
SEF002P
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC EC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-129.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. FE
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-129. CL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and MT
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM. AT
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-129.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-127
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
(Circuit) (Cont’d)

AEC522A

EC-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
(Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
EM
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. tors.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature LC
SEF330V sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 EC
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
Voltage:
Approximately 5V FE
OK

.
CL
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
MT
SEF136V s
minal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to AT
ground and short to power.

OK TF
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace engine coolant
(Engine coolant temperature sensor).
c
temperature sensor.
PD
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.
FA
OK
SEF137V
.
RA
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
BR
.
INSPECTION END
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
(Circuit) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Check resistance as shown in the figure.

<Reference data>

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
SEF152P
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

SEF012P

EC-130
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120

Throttle Position Sensor GI

Note: If DTC P0510 (0203) is displayed with P0120 (0403), perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
P0510 first. (See EC-314.) MA
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In EM
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen- LC
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the ‘‘Wide open and closed
throttle position switch’’, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

SEF105S FA

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values. RA
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully closed 0.2 - 0.8V BR
THRTL POS SEN (Engine stopped)
● Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.5V
● Ignition switch: ON
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0% ST
ABSOL THzP/S (Engine stopped)
● Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80%
RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-131
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ (Warm-up condition)

0.2 - 0.8V
Accelerator pedal fully released
23 L Throttle position sensor
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
3.5 - 4.5V
Accelerator pedal fully depressed

42 BR Sensors’ power supply Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 5V

Engine is running.
43 B/W Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V
Idle speed

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P0120 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0403 sent to ECM.* (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Throttle position sensor

B) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under ● Harness or connectors
light load driving condition. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Throttle position sensor
● Fuel injector
● Camshaft position sensor
● Mass air flow sensor
C) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under ● Harness or connectors
heavy load driving condition. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Intake air leaks
● Throttle position sensor

*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.

Throttle position sensor circuit Condition Driving condition

When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

EC-132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If the DTC cannot
be confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’. If there
MA
is no problem on ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’, perform
‘‘Procedure for malfunction C’’.
EM
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition LC
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
Procedure for malfunction A EC
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
FE
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. CL
● This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. MT

1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ AT

mode with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at
least 5 consecutive seconds. TF
VHCL SPEED SE: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
position PD
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FA
1) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at
SEF651U
least 5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) RA
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
position
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. BR
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ST
1) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at
least 5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) RS
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
position
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. BT
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC HA
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.

EL

IDX

EC-133
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction B
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If idle speed is over 1,100 rpm, maintain the following
conditions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed
below 1,100 rpm.
A/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
Brake pedal: Depressed
SEF712T Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
M/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘N’’
(Higher gear position such as 3rd or
4th position is better to keep engine
rpm low.)
Accelerator pedal: Released
Vehicle speed: As slow as possible
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If idle speed is over 1,100 rpm, maintain the following
conditions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed
below 1,100 rpm.
A/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
Brake pedal: Depressed
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
M/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘N’’
(Higher gear position such as 3rd or
4th position is better to keep engine
rpm low.)
Accelerator pedal: Released
Vehicle speed: As slow as possible
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If idle speed is over 1,100 rpm, maintain the following
conditions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed
below 1,100 rpm.
A/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’
Brake pedal: Depressed
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
M/T model
Selector lever: Suitable position except ‘‘N’’
(Higher gear position such as 3rd or
4th position is better to keep engine
rpm low.)
Accelerator pedal: Released
Vehicle speed: As slow as possible
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.

EC-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction C GI
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
MA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. EM
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
LC
5) Select ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’ and ‘‘ABSOL THzP/S’’ in
SEF024P ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
6) Press RECORD on CONSULT SCREEN at the same
time accelerator pedal is depressed.
EC
7) Print out the recorded graph and check the following:
● The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator
pedal depression. FE
● The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed
is approximately 4V.
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-138. CL
If OK, go to following step.
8) Select ‘‘AUTO TRIG’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with
CONSULT. MT
9) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): More than 2,000 rpm AT
MAS AIR/FL SE: More than 3V
COOLAN TEMP/S: More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever: Suitable position TF
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
engine load) will help maintain
the driving conditions required PD
for this test.
10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138. FA
SEF021P
RA

BR

ST

RS
SEF235U
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds.
Gear position: Suitable position
Engine speed: More than 2,000 rpm
Engine coolant temperature: More than 70°C (158°F)
Voltage between ECM terminal s 54 and ground:
More than 3V
2) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF535P
1) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds.
Gear position: Suitable position
Engine speed: More than 2,000 rpm
Voltage between ECM terminal s 54 and ground:
More than 3V
Voltage between ECM terminal s 59 and ground:
Less than 1.5V.
2) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least
5 seconds and then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
SEF509V 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-138.

EC-136
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC523A

EC-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If the trouble is duplicated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction
A’’, perform ‘‘Procedure A’’ below. If the trouble is duplicated
after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’, perform ‘‘Procedure B’’
on EC-140. If the trouble is duplicated after ‘‘Procedure for
malfunction C’’, perform ‘‘Procedure C’’ on EC-142.
Procedure A
INSPECTION START

SEF325V
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor har- tors.
ness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
s
SEF265S
3. Check voltage between terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK

.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 3 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
SEF564P If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 23 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
SEF565P ground and short to power.

OK
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

SEF566P

EC-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
GI
s
A

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
MA
c
(Throttle position sensor). sensor. To adjust it, per-
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, form ‘‘Basic Inspection’’,
EC-144. EC-74.
EM
OK
. LC
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors. EC
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2

s
terminal 1 and ground FE
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.) CL
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
MT
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR AT
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. TF
INSPECTION END

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure B
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

SEF325V
.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor har- tors.
ness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Check voltage between terminal 1 s
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK

.
SEF265S NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 3 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
SEF564P c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 23 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
c
(Throttle position sensor). sensor. To adjust it, per-
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, form ‘‘Basic Inspection’’,
SEF565P EC-144. EC-74.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace mass air flow sen-
c
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-112.

OK
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)
SEF566P

EC-140
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
s
A GI

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace camshaft position MA
c
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-257. EM
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT
NG Replace fuel injector.
LC
c
(Fuel injector).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-425. EC
OK
.
NG FE
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following. CL
● Continuity between joint connector-2
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2 MT
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist. AT
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
. TF
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
PD
.
INSPECTION END
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
Procedure C
INSPECTION START

.
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR.
Perform ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.

OK
.
SEF325V
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM. NG Reconnect the parts.
c
Check the followings for connection.
● Air duct
● Air cleaner
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to
collector
If disconnected, reconnect the parts.

OK
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
SEF265S 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor har- tors.
ness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Check voltage between terminal 1 s
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
SEF564P Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK

.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 3 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
SEF565P OK
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
GI
s
A

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
Repair open circuit, short MA
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 23 and terminal 2 . EM
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
LC
OK
SEF566P .
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace throttle position
(Throttle position sensor).
c
sensor. To adjust it, per-
EC
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ form ‘‘Basic Inspection’’,
below. EC-74.
FE
OK
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power CL
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2
MT
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.) AT
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.
TF
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. PD
.
INSPECTION END FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-143
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Throttle position sensor
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4. Check voltage of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position
sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF767W
Throttle valve conditions THRTL POS SEN
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to ‘‘Basic

Inspection’’, EC- 74.
5. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace throttle position sensor.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
SEF765W
perature.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal s 23 (Throttle posi-
tion sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position
sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to ‘‘Basic

Inspection’’, EC-74.
4. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace throttle position sensor.

EC-144
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the MA
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor EM
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
LC
SEF594K

<Reference data> EC
Engine coolant
Voltage* Resistance
temperature FE
V kV
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
CL
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 MT
SEF012P *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
s59 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 32 (ECM s AT
ground).

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC TF

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No.
(Possible Cause) PD
P0125 ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, ● Harness or connectors
0908 even when some time has passed after starting the (High resistance in the circuit) FA
engine. ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed ● Thermostat
loop fuel control. RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-145
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
● If both DTC P0115 (0103) and P0125 (0908) are displayed,
first perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115’’.
Refer to EC-126.
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
SEF002P
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ increases to more than 10°C
(50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test
result will be OK.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-148.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
If engine coolant temperature increases to more than
10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the
test result will be OK.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-148.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
If voltage between ECM terminal s 59 and ground
decreases to less than 3.8V within 65 minutes, stop
engine because the test result will be OK.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
SEF347Q
PROCEDURE’’, EC-148.

EC-146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
(Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC522A

EC-147
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. tors.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature
SEF330V sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1s
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
Voltage:
Approximately 5V

OK

.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
SEF136V s
minal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace engine coolant
c
(Engine coolant temperature sensor). temperature sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
SEF137V
.
CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION. NG CHECK COMPONENT
c
When the engine is cooled [lower than (Thermostat).
76.5°C (170°F)], hold lower radiator hose Refer to LC section (‘‘Ther-
and confirm the engine coolant does not mostat’’).
flow. If NG, replace it.

OK

.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-148
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
(Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Engine coolant temperature sensor MA
Check resistance as shown in the figure.

<Reference data> EM

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV

LC
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
SEF152P
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 EC

If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. FE

CL

MT
SEF012P

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-149
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front

HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM.
SEF463R The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.

SEF288D

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SENSOR
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ↔ RICH
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR
10 seconds.

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B After warming up to normal operating tempera-
sor
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF201T

EC-150
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Under the condition in which the front heated oxygen sensor sig- MA
nal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag- EM
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.

LC
SEF237U

EC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0130 ● The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. ● Harness or connectors
FE
0303 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front heated oxygen sensor

CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
CAUTION: TF
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- PD
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. FA
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF138V
Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle. RA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR P0130’’ of ‘‘FRONT O2 SEN- BR
SOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with CON-
SULT.
3) Touch ‘‘START’’. ST
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,000 rpm after this RS
step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to
SEF139V step 4).
5) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will BT
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately 10 to 60 HA
seconds.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,200 - 2,700 rpm (A/T)
1,400 - 3,200 rpm (M/T) EL
Vehicle speed: 70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.0 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
1.0 - 5.2 msec (M/T) IDX
Selector lever: Suitable position
SEF210V

EC-151
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d)
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
6) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-154.
During this test, P1148 may be displayed on CONSULT
screen.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
AEC873A rpm constant under no load.
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-154.

EC-152
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC858A

EC-153
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

SEF325V

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor to ground or short to power
harness connector and ECM harness in harness or connectors.
connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 (or terminal 2 ) and
SEF331V ground.
Continuity should not exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace front heated oxy-
c
(Front heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
SEF141V
.
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-1. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-1

s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-1
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-154
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front heated oxygen sensor MA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI- EM
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT, and select ‘‘FR O2 SEN-
SOR’’ and ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during LC
SEF084P
the following steps.
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen.
5) Check the following. EC
● ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode changes
from ‘‘RICH’’ to ‘‘LEAN’’ to ‘‘RICH’’ 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: FE

cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R CL

R = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘RICH’’

L = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘LEAN’’ MT
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes below 0.35V at least AT
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
TF

PD

FA

RA
SEF142V

CAUTION: BR
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ST
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- RS
cant.

BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
HA
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 EL
rpm constant under no load.
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT IDX
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR).
AEC873A
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
EC-155
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front
HO2S) (Cont’d)
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-156
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift GI

Monitoring) (Front HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MA
The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- EM
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. LC
SEF463R The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V. EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF288D

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SENSOR
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ↔ RICH PD
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR
10 seconds.
FA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).
RA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO. BR
0 - Approximately 1.0V

ST
Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B After warming up to normal operating tempera-
sor
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm. RS

SEF201T BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-157
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
To judge the malfunction, the output from the front heated oxygen
sensor is monitored to determine whether the ‘‘rich’’ output is suf-
ficiently high and whether the ‘‘lean’’ output is sufficiently low. When
both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will
be detected.

SEF300U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0131 ● The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are not ● Front heated oxygen sensor
0411 reached to the specified voltages. ● Front heated oxygen sensor heater
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF143V
Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR
P0131’’ of ‘‘FRONT O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK
SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 1.5 minutes.
NOTE:
SEF144V
Never raise engine speed above 3,000 rpm after this
step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to
step 5).
6) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately 50 seconds
or more.)
CMPSzRPM (REF):1,700 - 2,600 rpm (2WD model)
1,700 - 3,000 rpm (4WD model)
Vehicle speed: 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.0 - 4.8 msec
SEF211V
Selector lever: Suitable position
EC-158
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
MA
7) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-160. EM

LC

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- EC
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
FE
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
CL
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 MT
AEC873A rpm constant under no load.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ AT
● The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-160.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-159
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten front heated oxy-
gen sensor.
Tightening torque:
SEF332V 40 - 60 Nzm
(4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

.
Yes
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. c Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0171’’,
operating temperature. EC-224.
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching
SEF100P ‘‘CLEAR’’.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
AEC131A 5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Make sure diagnostic
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0115
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?

No
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace front heated oxy-
(Front heated oxygen sensor heater). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
s
A
MA
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace front heated oxy-
c
(Front heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor. EM
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK LC
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. EC
Refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0130’’ for circuit, EC-150.
FE
.
INSPECTION END CL

MT

COMPONENT INSPECTION AT
Front heated oxygen sensor heater
Check resistance between terminals s 3 and s1 . TF
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3V at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals s 2 and s1 , s3 and s
2 .
Continuity should not exist. PD
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been FA
SEF145V
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
RA
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-161
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
Front heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT, and select ‘‘FR O2 SEN-
SOR’’ and ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during
the following steps.
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen.
SEF084P 5) Check the following.
● ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode changes
from ‘‘RICH’’ to ‘‘LEAN’’ to ‘‘RICH’’ 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below:

cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R

R = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘RICH’’

L = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘LEAN’’
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes below 0.35V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF142V

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR).
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
AEC873A ● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.

EC-162
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Lean Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION: MA
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EM
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
LC
cant.

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-163
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift

Monitoring) (Front HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM.
SEF463R The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.

SEF288D

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SENSOR
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ↔ RICH
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR
10 seconds.

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B After warming up to normal operating tempera-
sor
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF201T

EC-164
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
To judge the malfunction, the output from the front heated oxygen MA
sensor is monitored to determine whether the ‘‘rich’’ output is suf-
ficiently high. The ‘‘lean’’ output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be EM
detected.

LC
SEF299U

EC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0132 ● The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are ● Front heated oxygen sensor FE
0410 beyond the specified voltages. ● Front heated oxygen sensor heater
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
CAUTION: TF
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- PD
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. FA
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF146V
Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat- RA
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. BR
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR
P0132’’ of ‘‘FRONT O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK ST
SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 1.5 minutes. RS
NOTE:
SEF147V
Never raise engine speed above 3,000 rpm after this
step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to BT
step 5).
6) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the HA
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately 50 seconds
or more.) EL
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,700 - 2,600 rpm (2WD model)
1,700 - 3,000 rpm (4WD model)
Vehicle speed: 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH) IDX
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.0 - 4.8 msec
SEF212V
Selector lever: Suitable position
EC-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
7) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-167.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
AEC873A rpm constant under no load.
● The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-167.

EC-166
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

. EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten front heated oxy-
gen sensor. LC
Tightening torque:
SEF332V
40 - 60 Nzm
(4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) EC

FE
.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA Yes Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
c
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0172’’, CL
operating temperature. EC-229.
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ MT
mode with CONSULT.
SEF100P 3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching AT
‘‘CLEAR’’.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed. TF
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine? PD
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor FA
harness connector, and restart
AEC131A and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed. RA
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
BR
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
ST
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Make sure diagnostic
RS
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
BT
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0114
detected? Is it difficult to start
HA
engine?

No EL
.

s
A
(Go to next page.) IDX

EC-167
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
s
A

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace front heated oxy-
c
(Front heated oxygen sensor heater). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Repair or replace harness
c
(Front heated oxygen sensor). and/or connectors or
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. replace front heated oxy-
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector gen sensor.
and check for water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3.
3. Check front heated oxygen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front heated oxygen sensor heater
Check resistance between terminals s 3 and s1 .
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3V at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals s 2 and s1 , s3 and s
2 .
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
SEF145V
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-168
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
Front heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- MA
perature.
2) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT, and select ‘‘FR O2 SEN- EM
SOR’’ and ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during
the following steps. LC
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen.
SEF084P 5) Check the following.
● ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode changes EC
from ‘‘RICH’’ to ‘‘LEAN’’ to ‘‘RICH’’ 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: FE
cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R CL
R = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘RICH’’
L = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘LEAN’’ MT
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes below 0.35V at least
AT
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
TF

PD

FA

RA
SEF142V

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been BR
dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- ST
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant. RS

BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
HA
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load. EL
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR). IDX
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
AEC873A
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
EC-169
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Rich Shift
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-170
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response GI

Monitoring) (Front HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MA
The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- EM
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. LC
SEF463R The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V. EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF288D

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SENSOR
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ↔ RICH PD
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR
10 seconds.
FA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground). RA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR (DC Voltage) BR
0 - Approximately 1.0V
ST
Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B
sor After warming up to normal operating tempera- RS
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF201T
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-171
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
To judge the malfunction of front heated oxygen sensor, this diag-
nosis measures response time of front heated oxygen sensor sig-
nal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and
load), fuel feedback control constant, and front heated oxygen sen-
sor temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compen-
sated time (front heated oxygen sensor cycling time index) is inor-
dinately long or not.

SEF298U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0133 ● The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes ● Harness or connectors
0409 more than the specified time. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front heated oxygen sensor
● Front heated oxygen sensor heater
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV
● Mass air flow sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF148V ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR
P0133’’ of ‘‘FRONT O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK
SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 1.5 minutes.
NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,000 rpm after
SEF149V
this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return
to step 5).
6) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately 20 seconds
or more.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,700 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,700 - 3,200 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed: 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.1 - 4.8 msec
Selector lever: Suitable position
SEF213V

EC-172
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
MA
7) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-175. EM

LC

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- EC
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
FE
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
CL
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 MT
AEC873A rpm constant under no load.
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT AT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR).
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-175.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-173
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)

AEC858A

EC-174
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. EM
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.
LC
.
SEF325V Loosen and retighten front heated oxygen
sensor.
Tightening torque: EC
40 - 60 Nzm
(4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

FE
.
NG
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK. c Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for CL
an exhaust air leak before three way cata-
lyst.

OK MT
.
NG
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. c Repair or replace.
SEF332V
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for
an intake air leak between the mass air AT
flow sensor and the intake manifold.

OK
.
Yes
TF
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. c Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0171’’,
operating temperature. EC-224 or ‘‘TROUBLE
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PD
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ P0172’’, EC-229.
mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching FA
‘‘CLEAR’’.
SEF099P 4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or RA
P0172 detected? Is it difficult
to start engine?
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. BR
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed. ST
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble RS
code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
SEF100P 6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results) BT
memory. Make sure diagnostic
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min- HA
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0115 or
0114 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine? EL
No
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)
IDX
AEC131A

EC-175
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor to ground or short to power
harness connector and ECM harness in harness or connectors.
connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
SEF141V
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 (or terminal 2 ) and
ground.
Continuity should not exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace front heated oxy-
(Front heated oxygen sensor heater). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
next page.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace front heated oxy-
(Front heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace mass air flow sen-
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-112.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Repair or replace PCV
(PCV valve). valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on EC-28.

OK
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-1. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-1
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-1
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-176
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front heated oxygen sensor heater MA
Check resistance between terminals s 3 and s1 .
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3V at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals s 2 and s1 , s3 and s
2 . EM
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor.
LC
CAUTION:
SEF145V ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
EC
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- FE
cant.
CL

MT

Front heated oxygen sensor AT

1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. TF
2) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT, and select ‘‘FR O2 SEN-
SOR’’ and ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’. PD
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during
the following steps.
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen.
FA
5) Check the following.
SEF084P
● ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode changes
from ‘‘RICH’’ to ‘‘LEAN’’ to ‘‘RICH’’ 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
RA
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below:

cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | BR
FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R

R = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘RICH’’ ST

L = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘LEAN’’
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once. RS
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes below 0.35V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage never exceeds 1.0V. BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-177
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (Cont’d)

SEF142V

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR).
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
AEC873A ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-178
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) GI

(Front HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MA
The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- EM
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. LC
SEF463R The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V. EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF288D

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SENSOR
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ↔ RICH PD
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR
10 seconds.
FA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground). RA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR (DC Voltage) BR
0 - Approximately 1.0V
ST
Engine is running.
Front heated oxygen sen-
50 B
sor After warming up to normal operating tempera- RS
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF201T
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-179
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the front
heated oxygen sensor output is not inordinately high.

SEF301U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0134 ● An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
0412 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front heated oxygen sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF232U 3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 5.5 minutes.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-183.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 5.5 minutes.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 5.5 minutes.
6) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
7) If DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE’’, EC-183.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 5.5 minutes.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
5) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-183.
EC-180
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
● When using GST, ‘‘DTC Confirmation Procedure’’ should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT or
ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II) because GST cannot dis- MA
play MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis.
Therefore, using CONSULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode
II) is recommended. EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-181
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d)

AEC858A

EC-182
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
MA
INSPECTION START

. EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten front heated oxy-
gen sensor.
Tightening torque: LC
40 - 60 Nzm
SEF332V
(4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
EC
.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short FE
1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor to ground or short to power
harness connector and ECM harness in harness or connectors.
connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM CL
s s
terminal 50 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
MT
s s
terminal 50 (or terminal 2 ) and
ground.
SEF331V
Continuity should not exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground AT
and short to power.

OK
.
NG
TF
CHECK COMPONENT c Repair or replace harness
(Front heated oxygen sensor). and/or connectors or
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. replace front heated oxy-
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector gen sensor.
PD
and check for water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3. FA
3. Check front heated oxygen sensor.
SEF141V Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page.
RA
OK
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power BR
2. Remove joint connector-1. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-1 ST
s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-1
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.) RS
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK BT
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. HA
.
INSPECTION END EL

IDX

EC-183
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’ in ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT, and select ‘‘FR O2 SEN-
SOR’’ and ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during
SEF084P the following steps.
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen.
5) Check the following.
● ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode changes
from ‘‘RICH’’ to ‘‘LEAN’’ to ‘‘RICH’’ 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below:

cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R

R = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘RICH’’

L = ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’, ‘‘LEAN’’
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage goes below 0.35V at least
once.
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF142V

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
● Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR).
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
AEC873A ● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.

EC-184
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Front HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION: MA
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EM
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
LC
cant.

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-185
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Front
Engine speed c
heated oxy-
Camshaft position sensor c ECM
gen sensor
heater

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Front heated oxygen sensor heater
Above 3,000 rpm (2WD models)
OFF
More than 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm (4WD models)
Below 3,000 rpm (All models)
ON
For 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm (4WD models only)

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine speed: Below 3,000 rpm (All models)
For 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm ON
(4WD models only)
FR O2 HEATER
● Engine speed: Above 3,000 rpm (2WD models)
More than 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds 3,000 OFF
rpm (4WD models)

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.

Engine speed is below 3,000 rpm. (All models) Approximately 0.4V

For 6 seconds after engine speed exceeds
3,000 rpm (4WD models only)
Front heated oxygen sen-
119 BR/Y Engine is running.
sor heater
Engine speed is above 3,000 rpm. (2WD mod- BATTERY VOLTAGE
els) (11 - 14V)
More than 6 seconds after engine speed
exceeds 3,000 rpm (4WD models)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0135 ● The current amperage in the front heated oxygen ● Harness or connectors
0901 sensor heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The front heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is
(An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
through the front heated oxygen sensor heater.) ● Front heated oxygen sensor heater

EC-186
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
MA
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
EM
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery LC
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF712T 1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. EC
2) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle
speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC FE
PROCEDURE’’, EC-189.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle CL
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle MT
speed.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
5) If DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-189.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle TF
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. PD
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
FA
PROCEDURE’’, EC-189.
● When using GST, ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CON-
FIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ should be performed twice as
much as when using CONSULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test
RA
Mode II) because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip
DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CON-
SULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II) is recommended. BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-187
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)

AEC859A

EC-188
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI

INSPECTION START
MA
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following. EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● 15A fuse
2. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor ● Harness connectors
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
LC
SEF331V s
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 short between front
and ground with CONSULT or tester. heated oxygen sensor
Voltage: Battery voltage and 15A fuse EC
If NG, repair harness or
OK connectors.
FE
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power CL
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ter-
s s
minal 3 and ECM terminal 119 .
MT
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
SEF150V
ground and short to power.
AT
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace front heated oxy-
(Front heated oxygen sensor heater). gen sensor. TF
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.
PD
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. FA
SEF151V
.
INSPECTION END
RA

COMPONENT INSPECTION
BR
Front heated oxygen sensor heater
Check resistance between terminals s 3 and s1 .
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3V at 25°C (77°F) ST
Check continuity between terminals s 2 and s1 , s3 and s
2 .
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. RS
CAUTION:
SEF145V ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a BT
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool HA
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
EL

IDX

EC-189
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage

Monitoring) (Rear HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The rear heated oxygen sensor (Rear HO2S), after three way
catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
for engine control operation.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
RR O2 SENSOR
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
rpm quickly LEAN ↔ RICH
RR O2 MNTR

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
Rear heated oxygen sen- After warming up to normal operating tempera-
56 OR 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sor ture and revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge malfunctions of the rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently low during various driving conditions such as
fuel-cut.

SEF304U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0137 ● The minimum voltage from the sensor has not reached the ● Harness or connectors
0511 specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors

EC-190
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
● ‘‘COMPLETED’’ will appear on CONSULT screen when all
tests ‘‘COND1’’, ‘‘COND2’’ and ‘‘COND3’’ are completed.
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO- LC
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
SEF152V
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped,
reperform this test from step 2). FE
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. CL
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR
P0137’’ of ‘‘REAR O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUP- MT
PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
SEF153V
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. AT
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under
no load.
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ appears on CONSULT screen, go to TF
step 11).
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ does not appear on CONSULT
screen, go to the following step. PD
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will FA
be displayed at ‘‘COND1’’ on the CONSULT screen.
SEF154V Maintain the conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’
changes to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately RA
60 seconds.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,200 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,400 - 3,200 rpm (M/T) BR
Vehicle speed: 64 - 120 km/h (40 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 0.5 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
0.5 - 5.2 msec (M/T) ST
Selector lever: Suitable position
NOTE:
● If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry RS
from step 2).
SEF155V ● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND2’’ is BT
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 9).
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely HA
[with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T models only)] from the above
condition [step 8] until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen has turned to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. [It will EL
take approximately 4 seconds.]

IDX

EC-191
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
NOTE:
● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND3’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND3’’ is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 10).
Procedure for COND3
10) Stop vehicle and let it idle until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ of
‘‘COND3’’ on CONSULT screen has turned to ‘‘COM-
PLETED’’. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6
minutes.)
SEF214V 11) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-194.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
AEC874A 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm
under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once
during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is
not necessary.
5) Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the volt-
age. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h
(50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with
‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once
during this procedure.
6)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-194.

EC-192
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC860A

EC-193
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

SEF325V

.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. Yes Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
c
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0172’’,
operating temperature. EC-229.
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching
‘‘CLEAR’’.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
SEF333V Is the 1st trip DTC P0172
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
SEF100P code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Make sure diagnostic
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0114
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
AEC131A No
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-194
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

s
A
MA
.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
● Harness connectors
EM
1. Disconnect rear heated oxygen sensor
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
2. Check harness continuity between ECM short between rear LC
SEF157V s s
terminal 56 and terminal 1 . heated oxygen sensor
Continuity should exist. and ECM
3. Check harness continuity between ECM If NG, repair open circuit, EC
s s
terminal 56 (or terminal 1 ) and short to ground or short to
ground. power in harness or con-
Continuity should not exist. nectors. FE
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK CL
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
c
Check the following. MT
Check harness continuity between termi- ● Harness connectors
SEF307U s
nal 4 and engine ground. ssM59 , F27
Continuity should exist. ● Joint connector-1
If OK, check harness for short to ground ● Harness for open or
AT
and short to power. short between rear
heated oxygen sensor
OK and ground TF
If NG, repair open circuit,
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- PD
nectors.

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace rear heated oxy- FA
c
(Rear heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
SEF158V
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page. RA
OK

. BR
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Joint connector-1

s
2. Disconnect harness connector F27 .
3. Check harness continuity between har-
● Harness for open or
short between harness
ST

s s
ness connector F27 terminal 14 and s
connector F27 and
ground. ground RS
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to power. short to power in harness
or connectors.
OK BT
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. HA

.
INSPECTION END
EL

IDX

EC-195
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Select ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode,
and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
SEF159V 4) Check ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ at idle speed when adjusting
‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ to ±25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be above 0.56V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is +25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be below 0.54V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
AEC874A
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once.
If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 5,000 rpm under
no load. Or keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then
check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D
position with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43987-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-196
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0137
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF431RB EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-197
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage

Monitoring) (Rear HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way
catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
for engine control operation.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
RR O2 SENSOR
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
rpm quickly LEAN ↔ RICH
RR O2 MNTR

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
Rear heated oxygen sen- After warming up to normal operating tempera-
56 OR 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sor ture and revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge malfunctions of the rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently high during various driving conditions such as
fuel-cut.

SEF303U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0138 ● The maximum voltage from the sensor has not reached the ● Harness or connectors
0510 specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

EC-198
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
● ‘‘COMPLETED’’ will appear on CONSULT screen when all
tests ‘‘COND1’’, ‘‘COND2’’ and ‘‘COND3’’ are completed.
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO- LC
SEF160V
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped,
reperform this test from step 2). FE
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
CL
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR
P0138’’ of ‘‘REAR O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUP-
MT
SEF161V PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. AT
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under
no load.
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ appears on CONSULT screen, go to TF
step 11).
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ does not appear on CONSULT
screen, go to the following step. PD
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will FA
be displayed at ‘‘COND1’’ on the CONSULT screen.
SEF162V
Maintain the conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’
changes to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately RA
60 seconds.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,200 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,400 - 3,200 rpm (M/T) BR
Vehicle speed: 64 - 120 km/h (40 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 0.5 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
0.5 - 5.2 msec (M/T) ST
Selector lever: Suitable position
NOTE:
● If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry RS
from step 2).
SEF163V ● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND2’’ is BT
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 9).
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely HA
[with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T models only)] from the above
condition [step 8] until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen is turned to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. [It will EL
take approximately 4 seconds.]

IDX

EC-199
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
NOTE:
● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND3’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND3’’ is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 10).
Procedure for COND3
10) Stop vehicle and let it idle until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ of
‘‘COND3’’ on CONSULT screen has turned to ‘‘COM-
PLETED’’. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6
minutes.)
SEF215V 11) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’.
If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-202.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
AEC874A 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm
under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once
during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is
not necessary.
5) Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the volt-
age. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h
(50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with
‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once
during this procedure.
6)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-202.

EC-200
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC860A

EC-201
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

SEF325V

.
Yes
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
c
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0171’’,
operating temperature. EC-224.
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching
‘‘CLEAR’’.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
SEF333V Is the 1st trip DTC P0171
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
SEF100P code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Make sure diagnostic
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0115
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
AEC131A No
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-202
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

s
A
MA
.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
● Harness connectors
EM
1. Disconnect rear heated oxygen sensor
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
2. Check harness continuity between ECM short between rear LC
SEF157V s s
terminal 56 and terminal 1 . heated oxygen sensor
Continuity should exist. and ECM
3. Check harness continuity between ECM If NG, repair open circuit, EC
s s
terminal 56 (or terminal 1 ) and short to ground or short to
ground. power in harness or con-
Continuity should not exist. nectors. FE
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK CL
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
c
Check the following. MT
Check harness continuity between termi- ● Harness connectors
SEF307U s
nal 4 and engine ground. ssM59 , F27
Continuity should exist. ● Joint connector-1
If OK, check harness for short to ground ● Harness for open or
AT
and short to power. short between rear
heated oxygen sensor
OK and ground TF
If NG, repair open circuit,
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- PD
nectors.

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace rear heated oxy- FA
c
(Rear heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
SEF158V
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page. RA
OK

. BR
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Joint connector-1

s
2. Disconnect harness connector F27 .
3. Check harness continuity between har-
● Harness for open or
short between harness
ST

s s
ness connector F27 terminal 14 and s
connector F27 and
ground. ground RS
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to power. short to power in harness
or connectors.
OK BT
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. HA

.
INSPECTION END
EL

IDX

EC-203
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Select ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode,
and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
SEF159V 4) Check ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ at idle speed when adjusting
‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ to ±25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be above 0.56V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is +25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be below 0.54V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
AEC874A
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once.
If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 5,000 rpm under
no load. Or keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then
check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D
position with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sytem
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-204
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF431RB EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-205
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response

Monitoring) (Rear HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way
catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
for engine control operation.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
RR O2 SENSOR
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
rpm quickly LEAN ↔ RICH
RR O2 MNTR

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
Rear heated oxygen sen- After warming up to normal operating tempera-
56 OR 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sor ture and revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge malfunctions of the rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the switching response of
the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during various driving
conditions such as fuel-cut.

SEF302U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0139 ● It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and ● Harness or connectors
0707 lean than the specified time. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

EC-206
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
● ‘‘COMPLETED’’ will appear on CONSULT screen when all
tests ‘‘COND1’’, ‘‘COND2’’ and ‘‘COND3’’ are completed.
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO- LC
SEF164V
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped,
reperform this test from step 2). FE
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
CL
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR
P0139’’ of ‘‘REAR O2 SENSOR’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUP-
MT
SEF165V PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Touch ‘‘START’’.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. AT
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under
no load.
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ appears on CONSULT screen, go to TF
step 11).
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ does not appear on CONSULT
screen, go to the following step. PD
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will FA
be displayed at ‘‘COND1’’ on the CONSULT screen.
SEF166V
Maintain the conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’
changes to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately RA
60 seconds.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,200 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,400 - 3,200 rpm (M/T) BR
Vehicle speed: 64 - 120 km/h (40 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 0.5 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
0.5 - 5.2 msec (M/T) ST
Selector lever: Suitable position
NOTE:
● If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry RS
from step 2).
SEF167V ● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND2’’ is BT
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 9).
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely HA
[with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T models only)] from the above
condition [step 8] until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ at ‘‘COND2’’ on
CONSULT screen has turned to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. [It will EL
take approximately 4 seconds.]

IDX

EC-207
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
NOTE:
● If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ already appears at ‘‘COND3’’ on
CONSULT screen before ‘‘Procedure for COND3’’ is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 10).
Procedure for COND3
10) Stop vehicle and let it idle until ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ of
‘‘COND3’’ on CONSULT screen has turned to ‘‘COM-
PLETED’’. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6
minutes.)
SEF216V 11) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’.
If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-210.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
AEC874A 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for
1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is
not necessary.
5) Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the volt-
age. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h
(50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with
‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for
1 second during this procedure.
6)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-210.

EC-208
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC860A

EC-209
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
SEF325V Yes
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. c
Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0171’’,
operating temperature. EC-224 or ‘‘TROUBLE
2. Select ‘‘SELF-LEARNING DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
CONT’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ P0172’’, EC-229.
mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching ‘‘CLEAR’’.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or
P0172 detected? Is it difficult
to start engine?
OR
SEF333V
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass
air flow sensor harness connec-
tor.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode II
(Self-diagnostic results) memory.
Make sure diagnostic trouble
SEF157V code No. 0505 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0115 or
0114 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?

No
.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Disconnect rear heated oxygen sensor ● Harness connectors
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
2. Check harness continuity between ECM short between rear
s s
terminal 56 and terminal 1 . heated oxygen sensor
Continuity should exist. and ECM
3. Check harness continuity between ECM If NG, repair open circuit,
s s
terminal 56 (or terminal 1 ) and short to ground or short to
ground. power in harness or con-
Continuity should not exist. nectors.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

.
OK

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-210
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

s
A
MA
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
Check harness continuity between termi- ● Harness connectors EM
s
nal 4 and engine ground. ssM59 , F27
● Joint connector-1
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground ● Harness for open or
and short to power. short between rear LC
SEF307U
heated oxygen sensor
OK and ground
If NG, repair open circuit, EC
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
FE
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace rear heated oxy-
(Rear heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor. CL
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK MT
.
SEF158V NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Joint connector-1 AT
s
2. Disconnect harness connector F27 .
3. Check harness continuity between har-
● Harness for open or
short between harness
s s
ness connector F27 terminal 14 and s
connector F27 and TF
ground. ground
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to power. short to power in harness
or connectors. PD
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
FA

.
RA
INSPECTION END

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-211
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Select ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode,
and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
SEF159V 4) Check ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ at idle speed when adjusting
‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ to ±25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be above 0.56V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is +25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be below 0.54V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
AEC874A
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once.
If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 5,000 rpm under
no load. Or keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then
check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D
position with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-212
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response
Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF431RB EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-213
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)

(Rear HO2S)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way
catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
for engine control operation.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
RR O2 SENSOR
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 0 - 0.3V ↔ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
.............................. ● Engine: After warming up
rpm quickly LEAN ↔ RICH
RR O2 MNTR

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
Rear heated oxygen sen- After warming up to normal operating tempera-
56 OR 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sor ture and revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge malfunctions of the rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether or not the voltage is too
high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.

SEF305U

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0140 ● An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
0512 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Rear heated oxygen sensor

EC-214
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting LC
the next test.
SEF168V
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. EC
2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) Maintain the following conditions at least 5 consecutive FE
seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,200 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,400 - 3,200 rpm (M/T) CL
VHCL SPEED SE: 64 - 120 km/h (40 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 0.5 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
0.5 - 5.2 msec (M/T) MT
COOLAN TEMP/S: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
AEC874A
Selector lever: Suitable position
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-217.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK TF
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed. PD
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. FA
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
4) Check the voltage after revving up to 4,000 rpm under RA
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.) BR
The voltage should be below 2V during this proce-
dure.
5)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-217. ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-215
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)

AEC860A

EC-216
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. EM
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.
LC
.
SEF325V NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Check the following.
1. Disconnect rear heated oxygen sensor ● Harness connectors EC
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
2. Check harness continuity between ECM short between rear
s s
terminal 56 and terminal 1 .
Continuity should exist.
heated oxygen sensor
and ECM
FE
3. Check harness continuity between ECM If NG, repair open circuit,
s s
terminal 56 (or terminal 1 ) and
ground.
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- CL
Continuity should not exist. nectors.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power. MT
OK
SEF333V
.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
NG
Check the following. AT
c
Check harness continuity between termi- ● Harness connectors
s
nal 4 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
ssM59 , F27
● Joint connector-1
If OK, check harness for short to ground ● Harness for open or
TF
and short to power. short between rear
heated oxygen sensor
OK and ground PD
If NG, repair open circuit, short
to ground or short to power in
harness or connectors.
.
FA
NG
SEF157V CHECK COMPONENT c Replace rear heated oxy-
(Rear heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. RA
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector
and check for water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3. BR
3. Check rear heated oxygen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page. ST
OK
.
NG RS
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Joint connector-1
SEF307U s
2. Disconnect harness connector F27 .
3. Check harness continuity between harness
● Harness for open or short
between harness connec-
BT
s s
connector F27 terminal 14 and ground. s
tor F27 and ground
If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power. short to power in harness or
connectors. HA
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. EL
.
INSPECTION END IDX
SEF158V

EC-217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Rear HO2S) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear heated oxygen sensor
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Select ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode,
and select ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
SEF159V 4) Check ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ at idle speed when adjusting
‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ to ±25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be above 0.56V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is +25%.
‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’ should be below 0.54V at least
once when the ‘‘FUEL INJECTION’’ is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
AEC874A
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 56 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once.
If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 5,000 rpm under
no load. Or keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then
check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D
position with ‘‘O/D’’ OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.

EC-218
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0140
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage)
(Rear HO2S) (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF431RB EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-219
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Rear
Engine speed c
heated oxy-
Camshaft position sensor c ECM
gen sensor
heater

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear OPERATION

heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the
Rear heated oxygen sensor
engine speed. Engine speed rpm
heater
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
OFF
(Engine is stopped.)
Engine is running. ON

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine speed: Idle after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h (43 MPH) or
ON
RR O2 HEATER more
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.

Idle speed after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h Approximately 0.4V

Rear heated oxygen sen- (43 MPH) or more
122 R/B
sor heater
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine is not running. (11 - 14V)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0141 ● The current amperage in the rear heated oxygen ● Harness or connectors
0902 sensor heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The rear heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is
(An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
through the rear heated oxygen sensor heater.) ● Rear heated oxygen sensor heater

EC-220
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
MA
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
EM
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery LC
voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
SEF712T 1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. EC
2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC FE
PROCEDURE’’, EC-223.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle CL
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than MT
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
5) If DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-223.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than TF
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. PD
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
FA
PROCEDURE’’, EC-223.
● When using GST, ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CON-
FIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ should be performed twice as
much as when using CONSULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test
RA
Mode II) because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip
DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CON-
SULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II) is recommended. BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-221
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)

AEC861A

EC-222
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START

MA
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● 15A fuse EM
2. Disconnect rear heated oxygen sensor ● Harness for open or
harness connector. short between rear
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. heated oxygen sensor
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 and 15A fuse LC
and ground. If NG, repair harness or
SEF333V
Voltage: Battery voltage connectors.

OK
EC
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors FE
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ter-
ssM58 , F28
● Harness for open or
s s
minal 3 and ECM terminal 122 . short between rear CL
Continuity should exist. heated oxygen sensor
If OK, check harness for short to and ECM
ground and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit, short
to ground or short to power in MT
OK harness or connectors.
SEF308U
.
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace rear heated oxy- AT
c
(Rear heated oxygen sensor heater). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below. TF
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR PD
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. FA
INSPECTION END
SEF169V

COMPONENT INSPECTION RA
Rear heated oxygen sensor heater
Check the following. BR
1. Check resistance between terminals s2 and s
3 .
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3V at 25°C (77°F)
2. Check continuity. ST
Terminal No. Continuity

s
1 and s
2 ,s
3 ,s
4
No
RS
s and s, s, s
4 1 2 3

If NG, replace the rear heated oxygen sensor. BT

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a HA
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool EL
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
IDX
SEF310U

EC-223
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171

Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought close to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the front heated oxygen sensor. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and theoretical ratios.
If the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM
judges the condition as a fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Front heated oxygen sensor c ECM c Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0171 ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Intake air leaks
0115 ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The ● Front heated oxygen sensor
mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Injectors
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Mass air flow sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
AEC554 3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘SELF-LEARN
CONTROL’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching
‘‘CLEAR’’.
5) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection
system has a malfunction.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If 1st
trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to ‘‘DIAG-
SEF712T NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-227. If engine does not
start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

EC-224
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)
(Cont’d) GI
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
MA
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed. EM
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor har-
ness connector.
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC LC
AEC131A P0100 is detected.
6) Select ‘‘MODE 4’’ with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC
P0100. EC
7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at
idle speed.
8) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 FE
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection
system has a malfunction. CL
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If 1st
trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-227. If engine does not MT
start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- AT
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. TF
Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor har- PD
ness connector.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
6) Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic FA
results) with ECM. Make sure 1st trip DTC 0102 is
detected.
7) Erase the 1st trip DTC 0102 by changing from Diagnos- RA
tic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I.
8) Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM. Make sure DTC 0505 is detected. BR
9) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at
idle speed.
The 1st trip DTC 0115 should be detected at this stage, ST
if a malfunction exists.
10) If it is difficult to start engine at step 9, the fuel injection
system also has a malfunction. RS
11) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If 1st
trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-227. If engine does not BT
start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak.

HA

EL

IDX

EC-225
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)
(Cont’d)

AEC862A

EC-226
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)
(Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA
.
NG
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK. c Repair or replace. EM
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an
exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.

.
OK LC
NG
SEF099P CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. c Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for
an intake air leak between the mass air EC
flow sensor and the intake manifold.

OK
. FE
NG
CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SEN- c Repair open circuit, short
SOR. to ground or short to power
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. in harness or connectors.
2. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor CL
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s
terminal 50 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
s MT
SEF331V 4. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 (or terminal 2 ) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
AT
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

OK
TF
.
NG
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. c Check the following.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. ● Fuel pump and circuit
PD
Refer to EC-29. Refer to EC-429.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check ● Fuel pressure regulator
fuel pressure. Refer to EC-29.
At idling: ● Fuel lines FA
When fuel pressure regulator valve Refer to ‘‘ENGINE
SEF141V
vacuum hose is connected. MAINTENANCE’’ in MA
235 kPa section.
(2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) ● Fuel filter for clogging RA
When fuel pressure regulator valve If NG, repair or replace.
vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa
(3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) BR
OK
.
NG
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. c Check connectors for ST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal rusted terminals or loose
operating temperature. connections in the mass
2. Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in air flow sensor circuit or
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with engine grounds. RS
CONSULT. Refer to EC-104.
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OR
BT
2. Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in
MODE 1 with GST.
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling HA
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OR
2. Check voltage between ECM ter-
s
minal 47 and ground.
0.9 - 1.8V: at idling
EL
1.9 - 2.3V: at 2,500 rpm

. OK IDX
s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-227
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)
(Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS. c
Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Install all parts removed. NOSIS FOR NON-DE-
2. Start engine. TECTABLE ITEMS,
3. Perform ‘‘POWER BALANCE’’ in ‘‘Injectors’’, EC-423.
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with Repair harness or connec-
CONSULT. tors.
SEF564N 4. Make sure that each circuit pro-
duces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OR
3. Listen to each injector operating
sound.
Clicking noise should be
heard.

OK
.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down
and there are no fire hazards near the
vehicle.
MEC703B
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Remove injector with fuel tube assem-
bly.
Refer to EC-30.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors con-
nected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should
remain connected.

.
SEF595Q NG
1. Disconnect all ignition coil harness con- c
Replace injectors from
nectors. which fuel does not spray
2. Place pans or saucers under each cyl- out. Refer to EC-30.
inder. Always replace O-ring with
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. new one.
Make sure that fuel sprays out from
injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for
each cylinder.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-228
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172

Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side) GI

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought close to the MA
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the front heated oxygen sensor. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and theoretical ratios.
If the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM EM
judges the condition as a fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Front heated oxygen sensor c ECM c Injectors
LC
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items EC

Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0172 ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Front heated oxygen sensor FE
0114 ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The ● Injectors
mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Mass air flow sensor
CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
NOTE: TF
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting PD
the next test.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. FA
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
AEC554 3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘SELF-LEARN
CONTROL’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with CONSULT. RA
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching
‘‘CLEAR’’.
5) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. BR
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. ST
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection
system has a malfunction.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If 1st RS
trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to ‘‘DIAG-
SEF712T NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-232. If engine does not
start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

HA

EL

IDX

EC-229
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)
(Cont’d)
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor har-
ness connector.
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC
AEC131A P0100 is detected.
6) Select ‘‘MODE 4’’ with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC
P0100.
7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at
idle speed.
8) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection
system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If 1st trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to
‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-232. If engine does
not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling,
etc.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Then restart engine and run it for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor har-
ness connector.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
6) Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM. Make sure 1st trip DTC 0102 is
detected.
7) Erase the 1st trip DTC 0102 by changing from Diagnos-
tic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I.
8) Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM. Make sure DTC 0505 is detected.
9) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at
idle speed.
The 1st trip DTC 0114 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists.
10) If it is difficult to start engine at step 9, the fuel injection
system also has a malfunction.
11) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If 1st trip DTC is detected and engine starts, go to
‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-232. If engine does
not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling,
etc.

EC-230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)
(Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC862A

EC-231
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK. c
Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for
an exhaust air leak before the warm-up
three way catalyst (California model), the
three way catalyst (Non-California model).
SEF099P
OK
.
NG
CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SEN- c
Repair harness or connec-
SOR. tors.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 and terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 50 (or terminal 2 ) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
SEF331V
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

OK
.
NG
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. c
Check the following.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. ● Fuel pump and circuit
Refer to EC-29. Refer to EC-429.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check ● Fuel pressure regulator
fuel pressure. Refer to EC-29.
At idling: If NG, repair or replace.
When fuel pressure regulator valve
vacuum hose is connected.
Approximately 235 kPa
SEF141V (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve
vacuum hose is disconnected.
Approximately 294 kPa
(3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)

OK
.
NG
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. c
Check connectors for
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal rusted terminals or loose
operating temperature. connections in the mass
2. Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in air flow sensor circuit or
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with engine grounds.
CONSULT. Refer to EC-104.
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OR
2. Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in
MODE 1 with GST.
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OR
2. Check voltage between ECM ter-
s
minal 47 and ground.
0.9 - 1.8V: at idling
1.9 - 2.3V: at 2,500 rpm

. OK

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-232
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)
(Cont’d) GI
s
A

MA
.
NG
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS. c
Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Install all parts removed. NOSIS FOR NON-DE- EM
2. Start engine. TECTABLE ITEMS,
3. Perform ‘‘POWER BALANCE’’ in ‘‘Injectors’’, EC-423.
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with Repair harness or connec-
CONSULT. tors.
LC
SEF564N 4. Make sure that each circuit pro-
duces a momentary engine
speed drop. EC
OR
3. Listen to each injector operating
sound. FE
Clicking noise should be
heard.

OK CL
.
Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-30. MT
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected
MEC703B to injector gallery.

AT
.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down
and there are no fire hazards near the
vehicle.
TF

.
Drips PD
1. Disconnect all injector harness connec- c
Replace any injectors from
tors. which fuel is dripping.
2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness con-
nectors. FA
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injec-
tor. RA
Does not drip.
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR BR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
ST
INSPECTION END

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-233
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180

Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The tank fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF334V

<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kV
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
s s
60 (Tank fuel temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 32 (ECM ground).

SEF012P

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Causes)
No.
P0180 ● An excessively high or low voltage is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
0402 ● Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
with the voltage signals from engine coolant tempera- ● Tank fuel temperature sensor
ture sensor and intake air temperature sensor.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF311U If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,
EC-237.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
NOTE: If ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ is already less than 60°C
(140°F) before step 4), the result will be OK.
If ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ is above 60°C (140°F), go
to the following step.
4) Cool engine down until ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ is less than
60°C (140°F).
5) Wait at least 10 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-237.

EC-234
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180
Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GI
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, MA
EC-237.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
3) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST and check for the engine EM
coolant temperature.
4) Cool engine down until the engine coolant temperature
is less than 60°C (140°F). If the temperature is already LC
less than 60°C (140°F) before step 4), the result will be
OK.
5) Wait at least 10 seconds. EC
6) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-237. FE

CL

MT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AT
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. TF
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, PD
EC-237.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4) Cool engine down until the voltage between ECM ter- FA
minal s 59 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and
SEF347Q
ground becomes more than 1.0V.
If the voltage is already more than 1.0V before step 4), RA
the result will be OK.
5) Wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and BR
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
7) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM. ST
8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-237.
RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-235
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180
Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)

AEC530A

EC-236
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180
Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
c EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect tank fuel temperature sen- ss C1 , M67
● Harness connectors
sor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM58 , F28 LC
SEF334V s
4. Check voltage between terminal T ● Harness for open or
and ground with CONSULT or tester. short between ECM and
Voltage: Approximately 5V tank fuel temperature EC
sensor
OK
If NG, repair harness or
connector. FE

.
NG CL
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- ssC1 , M67
MT
s
minal E and body ground. ● Harness for open or

SEF170V Continuity should exist. short between ECM and

If OK, check harness for short to body ground
ground and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
AT
short to ground or short to
OK
power in harness or con-
nectors.
TF
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
c
Replace tank fuel tempera- PD
(Tank fuel temperature sensor). ture sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below. FA
OK
SEF171V
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR RA
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

BR
.
INSPECTION END
ST

RS

BT
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Tank fuel temperature sensor
Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure HA
or a heat gun.

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV EL

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 IDX
SEF172V
If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor.
EC-237
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304

No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder

Misfire
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP
sensor signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) Engine speed ECM
䉴

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)

On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor sig-
nal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will
not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC
on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage
the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL
will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on mul-
tiple cylinders.
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
● Improper spark plug
P0300 (0701) ● Multiple cylinders misfire. ● Insufficient compression
● Incorrect fuel pressure
P0301 (0608) ● No. 1 cylinder misfires. ● EGR valve
● The injector circuit is open or shorted
● Injectors
P0302 (0607) ● No. 2 cylinder misfires.
● Intake air leak
● The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted
P0303 (0606) ● No. 3 cylinder misfires. ● Lack of fuel
● Drive plate/Flywheel
● Front heated oxygen sensor
P0304 (0605) ● No. 4 cylinder misfires.
● Incorrect distributor rotor

EC-238
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304
No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder
Misfire (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE (Overall) MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting LC
the next test.
SEF330U
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’, and select ‘‘DATA MONI-
TOR’’ mode with CONSULT. EC
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. FE
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 - 3,000 rpm for at
least 3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. CL
Note: Refer to the freeze frame data for the test
driving conditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO- MT
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- AT
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 - 3,000 rpm for at TF
least 3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
Note: Refer to the freeze frame data for the test PD
driving conditions.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO- FA
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- RA
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 - 3,000 rpm for at BR
least 3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds, and ST
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
5) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM. RS
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-239
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304
No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder
Misfire (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. c Discover air leak location
Start engine and run it at idle speed. Lis- and repair.
ten for the sound of the intake air leak.

OK
SEC547A .
NG
CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOG- c Repair or replace it.
GING.
Stop engine and visually check exhaust
tube, three way catalyst and muffler for
dents.

OK
.
NG
CHECK EGR FUNCTION. c Repair EGR system.
Perform DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for EGR
Function.
Refer to EC-356.
SEF564N
OK
.
No
PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST. c Go to on next page.
1. Perform ‘‘POWER BALANCE’’
in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.
2. Is there any cylinder which
does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
OR
When disconnecting each injector
harness connector one at a time,
is there any cylinder which does
not produce a momentary engine
SEF319V speed drop?

Yes

.
No
CHECK INJECTOR. c Check injector(s) and cir-
Does each injector make an operating cuit(s). Refer to EC-423.
sound at idle?

Yes
.
NG
CHECK IGNITION SPARK. c CHECK COMPONENT
1. Disconnect ignition wire from spark (Ignition wires).
plug. Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
2. Connect a known good spark plug to INSPECTION’’, EC-242.
MEC703B
the ignition wire.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suit- OK NG
able ground and crank engine. .
4. Check for spark. Replace.

OK
.
Check distributor rotor
head for incorrect parts.
Check ignition coil, power
transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-333.
.

s
A
SEF282G (Go to next page.)

EC-240
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304
No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder
Misfire (Cont’d) GI
s
A

.
MA
NG
CHECK SPARK PLUGS. c Repair or replace spark
Remove the spark plugs and check for plug(s) with standard type
fouling, etc. one(s). EM
For spark plug type, refer
OK to ‘‘ENGINE MAINTE-
NANCE’’ in MA section.
LC
.
SEF156I NG
CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE. c Check pistons, piston
Refer to EM section. rings, valves, valve seats
● Check compression pressure. and cylinder head gaskets. EC
Standard:
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
1,226 (12.5, 178) FE
Minimum:
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
1,030 (10.5, 149)
Difference between each cylinder: CL
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
98 (1.0, 14)

OK MT
.
SEF317V
NG
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. c Check the following.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to ● Fuel pump and circuit
EC-29. Refer to EC-429.
AT
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check ● Fuel pressure regulator
fuel pressure. Refer to EC-29.
At idle: ● Fuel lines TF
Approx. 235 kPa Refer to ‘‘ENGINE
(2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) MAINTENANCE’’ in MA
section.
OK ● Fuel filter for clogging PD
If NG, repair or replace.
.
NG FA
CHECK IGNITION TIMING. c Adjust ignition timing.
Perform ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.

OK
. RA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace front heated oxy-
(Front heated oxygen sensor). gen sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, BR
EC-162.

OK
.
NG ST
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. c Check connectors for
Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in rusted terminals or loose
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with connections in the mass
CONSULT. air flow sensor circuit or RS
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling engine grounds.
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm Refer to EC-104.
OR If NG, repair or replace it.
BT
Check ‘‘MASS AIR FLOW’’ in
MODE 1 with GST.
0.9 - 5.8 gzm/sec: at idling
7.5 - 13.2 gzm/sec: at 2,500 rpm HA
OR
Check voltage between ECM ter-
s
minal 47 and ground.
0.9 - 1.8V: at idling
EL
1.9 - 2.3V: at 2,500 rpm

. OK IDX
sB
(Go to next page.)

EC-241
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0304
No. 4 - 1 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder
Misfire (Cont’d)
s
B

.
NG
CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART. c Repair or replace.
Check items on the rough idle symptom in
‘‘Symptom Matrix Chart’’, EC-82.

OK
.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM
memory after performing the tests. Refer
to EC-48.

.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ignition wires
1. Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for
improper fit.
2. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap termi-
nal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent
breaks.
Resistance:
13.6 - 18.4 kV/m (4.15 - 5.61 kV/ft) at 25°C (77°F)
If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect igni-
SEF174P
tion wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or
replace the ignition wire with a new one.

EC-242
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325

Knock Sensor (KS) GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses MA
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. EM

LC
SEF598K

* Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock EC
sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic.
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s (ECM ground).
32

TER- CL
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running. MT
64 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.4V
Idle speed
AT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic
Check Items TF
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0325 ● An excessively low or high voltage from the knock ● Harness or connectors PD
0304 sensor is sent to ECM. (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Knock sensor

FA

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION RA

PROCEDURE
NOTE: BR
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting ST
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery RS
voltage is more than 10V at idle.
SEF712T 1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. BT
2) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC HA
PROCEDURE’’, EC-246.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle EL
speed.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC IDX
PROCEDURE’’, EC-246.

EC-243
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325
Knock Sensor (KS) (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-246.

EC-244
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325
Knock Sensor (KS) (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC529A

EC-245
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325
Knock Sensor (KS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness for open or
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. short between knock
3. Check harness continuity between ECM sensor and ECM

SEF173V
s
terminal 64 and ground. If NG, repair open circuit or
Resistance: short to ground or short to
Approximately 500 - 620 kV power in harness or con-
[at 25°C (77°F)] nectors.
If OK, check harness for short to ● Knock sensor (Refer to
ground and short to power. ‘‘COMPONENT INSPEC-
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter TION’’ below.)
which can measure more than 10 If NG, replace knock sen-
MV. sor.

OK
.
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Remove joint connector-2. in harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2

s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Knock sensor
● Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MV.
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminal s
1 and ground.
Resistance: 500 - 620 kV [at 25°C (77°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or
physically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF174V

EC-246
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle MA
housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate.
It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. EM
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to LC
SEF956N change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes. EC
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is FE
used only for the on board diagnosis.
CL

MT
SEF335V

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE AT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER- TF
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (AC Voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0V
PD

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) FA

Idle speed
RA
Crankshaft position sensor SEF112V
47 L
(OBD) Approximately 0V BR

Engine is running. ST
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

RS
SEF113V

BT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
HA
No.
P0335 ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position ● Harness or connectors
0802 sensor (OBD) is not sent to ECM while the engine is (The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) circuit is EL
running at the specified engine speed. open.)
● Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
● Dead battery IDX

EC-247
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT.
SEF712T
2) Start engine and run it for at least 15 seconds at idle
speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-250.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 15 seconds at idle
speed.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-250.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 15 seconds at idle
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-250.

EC-248
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC531A

EC-249
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

SEF325V .
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor ● Harness connectors
(OBD) and ECM harness connectors. s sE202 , E32
● Harness connectors
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal
s s
47 and terminal 2 .
ssE41 , F25
● Harness for open or
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to short between ECM and
ground and short to power. crankshaft position sen-
sor (OBD)
OK If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
SEF335V
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- s s
E202 , E32
s
minal 1 and engine ground. ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ssE41 , F25
● Harness for open or
ground and short to power. short between crankshaft
position sensor (OBD)
OK and ECM
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
SEF175V
nectors.

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace crankshaft posi-
[Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)]. tion sensor (OBD).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
s
2. Disconnect harness connector E32 .
3. Check harness continuity between har-
ssE41 , F25
● Joint connector-1

SEF176V s s
ness connector E32 terminal 2 and ● Harness for open or
ground. short between harness
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.
s
connector E32 and
ground
If NG, repair open circuit or
OK short to power in harness
or connectors.
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END
SEF177V

EC-250
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) MA
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. EM
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
LC
SEF960N

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. EC

Resistance: Approximately 512 - 632V
[at 20°C (68°F)]
If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). FE

CL

MT
SEF504V

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-251
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340

Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the engine
control system. It monitors engine speed and piston position.
These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection,
ignition timing and other functions.
The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-form-
ing circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and
4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists
SEF928V
of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes.
The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode.
The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns,
the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These
pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit
and sent to the ECM.
The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an
assembly except distributor cap and rotor head.
NOTE:
The rotor screw which secures the distributor rotor head to
the distributor shaft must be tightened properly.
: 3.3 - 3.9 Nzm (0.34 - 0.40 kg-m, 29.5 - 34.7 in-lb)
SEF853B

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0 - 1V

For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
4 LG/R ECCS relay (Self-shutoff) ‘‘OFF’’

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’

BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ‘‘OFF’’

0.2 - 0.5V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

44 PU
Idle speed

Camshaft position sensor SEF114V

(Reference signal) 0 - 0.5V

Engine is running.
48 PU
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF200T

EC-252
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
MA
Approximately 2.6V

EM
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed
LC

Camshaft position sensor SEF195T

49 LG EC
(Position signal) Approximately 2.5 - 2.6V

FE
Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

CL

SEF196T
MT
67 B/P BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
72 B/P (11 - 14V)
AT
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 B/P Current return
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
TF
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic
Check Items
PD
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0340 A) Either 1° or 180° signal is not sent to ECM for the ● Harness or connectors FA
0101 first few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor circuit is open or
........................................................................................... shorted.)
● Camshaft position sensor
B) Either 1° or 180° signal is not sent to ECM often ● Starter motor (Refer to EL section.) RA
enough while the engine speed is higher than the ● Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
specified engine speed. ● Dead (Weak) battery
...........................................................................................
C) The relation between 1° and 180° signal is not in the
BR
normal range during the specified engine speed.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION ST

PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If DTC cannot be RS
confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B and C’’.

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-253
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction A
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 10.5V.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
SEF232U 2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.

Procedure for malfunction B and C

NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 10.5V.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
SEF712T 2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle
speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle
speed.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-256.

EC-254
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC029B

EC-255
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (DETECTABLE CIRCUIT)
INSPECTION START

.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor har- ● Harness for open or
SEF325V ness connector. short between camshaft
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. position sensor and ECM
s
3. Check voltage between terminal 5 and ● Harness for open or
ground with CONSULT or tester. short between camshaft
Voltage: Battery voltage position sensor and
ECCS relay
OK If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short to
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ground or short to power in
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between sensor
s s
terminal 4 and ECM terminal 49 , sensor
SEF128S s ss
terminal 3 and ECM terminals 44 , 48 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

OK
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short to
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ground or short to power in
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor har- harness or connectors.
ness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between sensor
s
terminal 6 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
SEF040S and short to power.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace camshaft position
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page.

OK
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short to
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ground or short to power in
2. Remove joint connector-2. harness or connectors.
3. Check the following.
● Continuity between joint connector-2
SEF178V s
terminal 1 and ground
● Joint connector-2
(Refer to ‘‘HARNESS LAYOUT’’ in EL
section.)
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

SEF046S

EC-256
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
Camshaft position sensor
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- MA
ture.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal s 49 and ground, ECM
terminal s
44 or s
48 and ground. EM
Condition Terminal Voltage
Approximately 2.6V LC
SEF179V

EC
s
49 and ground

FE

Engine running at idle

SEF195T CL
0.2 - 0.5V

MT

s
44 or s
48 and ground
AT

SEF114V
TF
Approximately 2.5 - 2.6V

PD

s
49 and ground
FA

RA
Engine speed is 2,000 SEF196T
rpm 0 - 0.5V
BR

s
44 or s
48 and ground ST

RS
SEF200T

BT
If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sen-
sor.
HA

EL

IDX

EC-257
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400

EGR Function (Close)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
c

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

c

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

c

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EGRC-sole-

c ECM c
noid valve
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
c

Ignition switch Start signal

c

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

c

This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the ● Low engine coolant temperature
EGR valve to suit engine operating conditions. This ● Engine starting
cut-and-control operation is accomplished through ● High-speed engine operation
the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve. When the ● Engine idling
ECM detects any of the following conditions, current ● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
flows through the solenoid valve. This causes the ● Mass air flow sensor malfunction
port vacuum to be discharged into the atmosphere. ● Low intake air temperature
The EGR valve remains closed.

SEF641Q

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response
to throttle valve opening. The vacuum controls the movement of a
taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR valve.

SEF783K

EC-258
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
EGRC-solenoid valve GI
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the sole-
noid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to cut the vacuum MA
signal from the throttle body to the EGR valve.
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal passes
through the solenoid valve. The signal then reaches the EGR valve. EM

LC
SEF240PD

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC EC

If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sen-
sor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction
FE
is diagnosed.

CL

MT
SEF073P

AT
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0400 ● No EGR flow is detected under condition that calls ● EGR valve stuck closed TF
0302 for EGR. ● EGRC-BPT valve
● Vacuum hose
● EGRC-solenoid valve PD
● EGR passage
● EGR temperature sensor
● Exhaust gas leaks FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-259
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn igni-
tion switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before con-
ducting the next test.
● P0400 will not be displayed at ‘‘SELF-DIAG RESULTS’’
mode with CONSULT even though DTC work support test
SEF180V result is ‘‘NG’’.
TESTING CONDITION:
For best results, perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
2) Check ‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode
witch CONSULT.
Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is within the range
listed below.
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool
place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do
not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan
or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce
SEF181V
an inaccurate diagnostic result.
3) Start engine and let it idle monitoring the value of
‘‘COOLAN TEMP/S’’. When the engine coolant tem-
perature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the
next step.
4) Select ‘‘EGR SYSTEM P0400’’ of ‘‘EGR SYSTEM’’ in
‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Touch ‘‘START’’.
6) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH)
once and then stop vehicle with engine running.
If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ with ‘‘OK’’ appears on CONSULT
screen, go to step 9).
SEF269U If ‘‘COMPLETED’’ does not appear on CONSULT
screen, go to the following step.
7) Check the output voltage of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’ (at
closed throttle position) and note it.
8) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to ‘‘COM-
PLETED’’. (It will take approximately 40 seconds or
more.)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,800 - 2,600 rpm (A/T)
2,000 - 2,600 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL: 3.0 - 3.5 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 3.5 msec (M/T)
THRTL POS SEN: (X + 0.23) − (X + 0.73) V
X = Voltage value measured at
step 7)
Selector lever: Suitable position
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
9) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-263.

EC-260
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GI
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall EGR function. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. MA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check the EGR valve lifting when revving engine from EM
2,000 rpm to 4,000 rpm quickly under no load using the
following methods.
● Disconnect EGRC-solenoid valve harness connector. LC
SEF336V (The DTC for EGRC-solenoid valve will be displayed,
however, ignore it.)
EGR valve should lift up, and go down without EC
sticking.
If NG, go to in DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE on
EC-263. FE
3) Check voltage between ECM terminal s 63 (EGR tem-
perature sensor) and ground at idle speed.
Less than 4.5V should exist. CL
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
5) Check harness continuity between EGR temperature
sensor harness connector terminal s 2 and ECM termi- MT
nal s43 (ECM ground).
SEF182V
Continuity should exist.
6) Perform ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, ‘‘EGR tem- AT
perature sensor’’. Refer to EC-265.

TF

PD

FA
SEF183V

RA

BR

ST

RS
SEF642Q

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-261
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)

AEC533A

EC-262
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI

INSPECTION START
MA
.
NG
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. c Repair or replace exhaust
Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks. system. EM
OK
.
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE TO EGR
OK
CHECK COMPONENT
LC
c
SEF099P VALVE. (EGR valve).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
operating temperature. INSPECTION’’ on next EC
2. Disconnect vacuum hose to EGR valve. page.
3. Check for vacuum existence.
4. Check for vacuum existence when rev- NG
ving engine from 2,000 rpm up to 4,000 FE
rpm with the following methods.
Vacuum should not exist at idle.
● Select ‘‘EGRC SOLENOID
VALVE’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
CL
mode with CONSULT and turn
the solenoid valve ‘‘OFF’’.
Vacuum should exist when
.
MT
revving engine.
SEF337V OR Replace EGR valve.
● Disconnect EGRC-solenoid
valve harness connector. (The AT
1st trip DTC for EGRC-solenoid
valve will be displayed, but
ignore it.) TF
Vacuum should exist when
revving engine.

.
NG PD
NG
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. c Repair or replace vacuum
Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks hose.
or improper connection. FA
Refer to ‘‘Vacuum Hose Drawing’’, EC-16.
SEF184V
OK
. RA
NG
CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE CIR- c Check the following.
CUIT. ● Harness connectors
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Perform ‘‘EGRC SOL/V CIR-
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
BR
CUIT’’ in ‘‘FUNCTION TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
ssM59 , F27
● 10A fuse
OR ● Harness for open or ST
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. short between fuse
2. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’ block and EGRC-sole-
and ‘‘OFF’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ noid valve
mode with CONSULT and check ● Harness for open or
RS
operating sound. short between ECM and
SEF109L EGRC-solenoid valve
OR
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. If NG, repair open circuit or BT
2. Check operating sound of the short to power in harness
solenoid valve when disconnect- or connectors.
ing and reconnecting EGRC-
solenoid valve harness connec- HA
tor. (The DTC or the 1st trip
DTC for the EGRC-solenoid
valve will be displayed, however, EL
ignore it.)

. OK

s
A IDX
(Go to next page.)
MEF957D

EC-263
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGRC-solenoid
(EGRC-solenoid valve). valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGRC-BPT valve.
(EGRC-BPT valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on the next page.
SEF184V
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGR temperature
(EGR temperature sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
EGR valve
● Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
● Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.

MEF137D

EGRC-solenoid valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘EGRC SOLENOID VALVE’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode.
Air passage Air passage
Condition
continuity continuity
s s s s
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
SEF185V
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage Air passage

Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and s Yes No
s
2
No supply No Yes

AEC919
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EGRC-sole-
noid valve.
EC-264
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0400
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
EGR temperature sensor GI
Check resistance change and resistance value.
<Reference data> MA
EGR temperature Voltage Resistance
°C (°F) V MV
EM
0 (32) 4.81 7.9 - 9.7
50 (122) 2.82 0.57 - 0.70
100 (212) 0.8 0.08 - 0.10 LC
SEF643Q If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA
SEF526Q

EGRC-BPT valve RA
1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve.
2. Vacuum from the other port and check for leakage while apply- BR
ing a pressure above 0.981 kPa (100 mmH2O, 3.94 inH2O)
from under EGRC-BPT valve.
3. If a leakage is noted, replace the valve. ST

RS
SEF083P
BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-265
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402

EGRC-BPT Valve Function

SEF453PD

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The EGRC-BPT valve monitors exhaust pressure to activate the diaphragm, controlling throttle body vacuum
applied to the EGR valve. In other words, recirculated exhaust gas is controlled in response to positioning of
the EGR valve or to engine operation.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

If too much EGR flow exists due to an EGRC-BPT valve malfunction, off idle engine roughness will increase.
If the roughness is large, then the vacuum to the EGR valve is interrupted through the EGRC-solenoid valve.
If the engine roughness is reduced at that time, the EGRC-BPT valve malfunction is indicated.
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0402 ● The EGRC-BPT valve does not operate properly. ● EGRC-BPT valve
0306 ● EGR valve
● Misconnected rubber tube
● Blocked rubber tube
● Camshaft position sensor
● Blocked exhaust system
● Orifice
● Mass air flow sensor
● EGRC-solenoid valve

EC-266
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402
EGRC-BPT Valve Function (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
MA
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- EM
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. LC
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF930V ● For best results, perform at a temperature above 5°C
(41°F). EC
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Install vacuum gauge between EGRC-BPT valve and FE
EGR valve as shown in the figure at left.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. CL
3) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘EGRC-BPT/V
P0402’’ of ‘‘EGR SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUP- MT
PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
SEF186V 5) Start engine and let it idle.
6) Touch ‘‘START’’. AT
7) Check the output voltage of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’ (at
closed throttle position) and note it.
8) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will TF
be displayed on the CONSULT screen and the bar chart
may increase. Maintain the conditions until ‘‘COM-
PLETED’’ appears. PD
Selector lever: Suitable position
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,400 - 1,600 rpm (A/T)
1,600 - 1,800 rpm (M/T) FA
Vehicle speed: 30 - 54 km/h (19 - 34 MPH) (A/T)
SEF187V 30 - 100 km/h (19 - 62 MPH) (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.0 - 2.7 msec RA
THRTL POS SEN: (X + 0.13) - (X + 0.89) V
X = Voltage value measured at
step 7 BR
● The bar chart on CONSULT screen indicates the
status of this test. However, the test may be fin-
ished before the bar chart becomes full scale. ST
● If the bar chart indication does not continue to
progress, completely release accelerator pedal
once and try to meet the conditions again. RS
● If ‘‘TESTING’’ does not appear on CONSULT screen,
SEF275U retry from step 2).
9) If CONSULT instructs to carry out ‘‘OVERALL FUNC- BT
TION CHECK’’, go to next step. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed,
refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-258.
10) Open engine hood.
HA
11) Raise engine speed to 2,400 - 3,200 rpm under no-load
and hold it. Then touch ‘‘NEXT’’ on the CONSULT
screen.
EL

IDX
AEC875A

EC-267
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402
EGRC-BPT Valve Function (Cont’d)
11) Check vacuum gauge while keeping engine speed at
2,400 - 3,200 rpm.
Vacuum should be 0 to −150 mmHg (0 to −5.91 inHg).
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-269.
If OK, go to next step before touching ‘‘YES’’ on the
CONSULT screen.
12) Check the EGR valve lifting when revving from 2,000
rpm to 4,000 rpm quickly under no load.
EGR valve should lift up, and go down without
sticking when the engine is returned to idle.
SEF963V If NG, check EGR valve.
If OK, touch ‘‘YES’’ on the CONSULT screen.
13) Check the rubber tube between EGR valve and EGRC-
BPT valve for cracks, blockages or twists.
If NG, repair.
If OK, touch ‘‘YES’’ on the CONSULT screen.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SEF360Q

OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EGRC-BPT
valve. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1) Install vacuum gauge between EGRC-BPT valve and
EGR valve as shown in the figure at left.
2) Lift up vehicle.
3) Start engine and shift to 1st gear or 1 position.
4) Check vacuum gauge while keeping engine speed at
2,400 - 3,200 rpm.
Vacuum should be 0 to −150 mmHg (0 to −5.91
SEF930V inHg).
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-269.
If OK, go to next step.
5) Check the EGR valve lifting when revving engine from
2,000 rpm to 4,000 rpm quickly under no load.
EGR valve should lift up, and go down without
sticking when the engine is returned to idle.
6) Check rubber tube between EGRC-solenoid valve and
throttle body for misconnection, cracks or blockages.

SEF360Q

EC-268
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402
EGRC-BPT Valve Function (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
CHECK HOSE. NG Repair or replace vacuum
c
Check vacuum hose for clogging and hose. EM
improper connection.

OK
.
LC
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. NG Repair or replace exhaust
c
Check exhaust system for collapse. system.
EC
OK
.
CHECK ORIFICE. NG Replace vacuum hose.
c FE
Check if orifice is installed in vacuum
hose between EGRC-BPT valve and
EGRC-solenoid valve.
CL
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
c
Replace EGRC-BPT valve. MT
(EGRC-BPT valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page. AT
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace camshaft position TF
c
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-257. PD
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace mass air flow sen- FA
c
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-112. RA
OK
.
NG BR
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EGRC-solenoid
c
(EGRC-solenoid valve). valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
ST
on next page.

OK
. RS
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EGR valve.
c
(EGR valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ BT
on the next page.

OK
. HA
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
EL
.
INSPECTION END
IDX

EC-269
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402
EGRC-BPT Valve Function (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EGRC-BPT valve
1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve.
2. Vacuum from the other port and check leakage without apply-
ing any pressure from under EGR-BPT valve.
Leakage should exist.

SEF172P

EGR valve
● Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
● Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.

MEF137D

EGRC-solenoid valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘EGRC SOLENOID VALVE’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode.
Air passage Air passage
Condition
continuity continuity
s s s s
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
SEF185V
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage Air passage

Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and s Yes No
s
2
No supply No Yes

AEC919 If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EGRC-sole-

noid valve.

EC-270
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420

Three Way Catalyst Function GI

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of front and rear MA
heated oxygen sensors.
Three way catalyst* with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate
a low switching frequency of rear heated oxygen sensor. As oxy- EM
gen storage capacity decreases, the rear heated oxygen sensor
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of front and rear heated oxygen sensors LC
SEF184UB
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst* malfunc-
tion is diagnosed.
*: Warm-up three way catalyst (For California) EC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items

Malfunction is detected when ... FE
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0420 ● Three way catalyst* does not operate properly. ● Three way catalyst*
0702 ● Three way catalyst* does not have enough oxygen storage ● Exhaust tube
●
CL
capacity. Intake air leaks
● Injectors
● Injector leaks
● Spark plug
MT
● Improper ignition timing
*: Warm-up three way catalyst (For California) AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-271
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420
Three Way Catalyst Function (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
SEF321U 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set ‘‘MANU TRIG’’ and ‘‘HI SPEED’’, then select ‘‘FR
O2 SENSOR’’, ‘‘RR O2 SENSOR’’, ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’,
‘‘RR O2 MNTR’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CON-
SULT.
4) Touch ‘‘RECORD’’ on CONSULT screen with engine
speed held at 2,000 rpm constantly under no load.
5) Make sure that the switching frequency between
‘‘RICH’’ and ‘‘LEAN’’ of ‘‘RR O2 MNTR’’ is much less
than that of ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ as shown below.
Switching frequency ratio =
SEF215U
Rear heated oxygen sensor switching frequency
Front heated oxygen sensor switching frequency

This ratio should be less than 0.75.

If the ratio is greater than above, the warm-up three way
catalyst (Models for California), the three way catalyst
(Models except for California) is not operating properly.
If the ‘‘FR O2 MNTR’’ does not indicate ‘‘RICH’’ and
‘‘LEAN’’ periodically more than 5 times within 10
seconds at step 4), perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES FOR DTC P0133’’ first. (See EC-171.)
If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,
EC-274.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
6) Select ‘‘AUTO TRIG’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with
CONSULT.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 84 to 96 km/h
(52 to 60 MPH) with the following for at least 10 con-
secutive minutes.
(Drive the vehicle in an area where vehicle speed and
accelerator pressure can be held steady and constant.)
M/T: 5th position
A/T: D position (‘‘OD’’ ON)
If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,
EC-274.
8) Select ‘‘SRT STATUS’’ in ‘‘DTC CONFIRMATION’’
mode with CONSULT.
9) Verify that ‘‘CATALYST’’ is ‘‘CMPLT’’.
If not ‘‘CMPLT’’, repeat the test from step 5).

EC-272
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420
Three Way Catalyst Function (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GI
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst. MA
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. EM
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal s 50 (front
heated oxygen sensor signal) and ECM ground, and LC
AEC876A ECM terminal s 56 (rear heated oxygen sensor signal)
and ECM ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no EC
load.
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high &
low) between ECM terminal s 56 and ECM ground is FE
much less than that of ECM terminal s 50 and ECM
ground.
Switching frequency ratio = CL

Rear heated oxygen sensor voltage switching fre-

quency MT
Front heated oxygen sensor voltage switching fre-
quency AT
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way TF
catalyst does not operate properly.
Note: If the voltage at terminal s50 does not switch peri-
odically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at PD
step 4, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
P0133 first. (See EC-150.)
6) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ on next FA
page.

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-273
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420
Three Way Catalyst Function (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. c
Repair or replace it.
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler
for dents.

OK
.
SEF099P NG
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK. c
Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for
an exhaust air leak before the warm-up
three way catalyst (California model), the
three way catalyst (Non-California model).

OK
.
NG
CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK. c
Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for
an intake air leak after the mass air flow
sensor.

OK
SEF282G .
NG
CHECK IGNITION SPARK. c
CHECK COMPONENT
1. Disconnect ignition wire from spark (Ignition wires).
plug. Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
2. Connect a known good spark plug to INSPECTION’’, EC-242.
the ignition wire.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suit- OK NG
.
able ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark. Replace.

OK .
Check ignition coil, power
transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-333.
SEF189V

.
NG
CHECK INJECTORS. c
Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for NOSIS FOR NON-DE-
Injectors, EC-423. TECTABLE ITEMS,
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition ‘‘Injector’’, EC-423.
switch ‘‘ON’’. Repair harness or connec-
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals tors.
sss
102 , 104 , 109 and 111 ands
ground with CONSULT or tester.
Battery voltage should exist.

OK
.
NG
Check for ignition timing. c
Adjust ignition timing.
Refer to ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.

OK
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-30.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors con-
nected to injector gallery.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-274
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420
Three Way Catalyst Function (Cont’d)
GI
s
A

.
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor Drips Replace the injector(s) MA
c
harness connector. from which fuel is dripping.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injec- EM
tor.

Does not drip LC

.
Trouble
is not
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR fixed Replace warm-up three
c
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. way catalyst*.
EC
Trouble is fixed
*: Three way catalyst (For
. Non-California) FE
INSPECTION END

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-275
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System

(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure)
Note: If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See
EC-392.)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP can-
ister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following ‘‘Vacuum test’’ conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be closed to shut the EVAP
purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP
purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve will be closed.

SEF918U

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0440 ● EVAP control system has a leak. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
0705 ● EVAP control system does not operate properly. ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control
valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system
pressure sensor
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
and the circuit
● Absolute pressure sensor
● Tank fuel temperature sensor
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve and the circuit
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to MAP/BARO switch
solenoid valve
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing
or damaged.
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water.
● EVAP control system pressure sensor

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

EC-276
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
NOTE:
● If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See EC-392.) EM
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before LC
conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Perform ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ when the fuel level is EC
less than 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
● It is better that the fuel level is low. FE
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
CL
mode with CONSULT.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) MT
SEF405W INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
5) Select ‘‘EVAP SML LEAK P0440’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with AT
CONSULT.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE: TF
● If the CONSULT screen shown at left is displayed,
stop the engine and stabilize the vehicle tempera-
ture at 25°C (77°F) or cooler. After ‘‘TANK F/TMP PD
SE’’ becomes less than 30°C (86°F), retest.
(Use a fan to reduce the stabilization time.)
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the FA
range displayed on CONSULT screen, go to ‘‘Basic
SEF669U
Inspection’’, EC-74.
6) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed. RA
If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-279.
NOTE: BR
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve prop-
erly. ST

RS
SEF929V
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SEF297U

EC-277
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of ‘‘Driving pattern’’ on EC-42
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2)Drive vehicle according to ‘‘Driving pattern’’, EC-42.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the follow-
ing step.
● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to ‘‘Driving pattern’’,
EC-42.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
● If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447’’, EC-386.
● If P0440 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-279.
● If P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE’’ in ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P1440’’, EC-366.
● If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the
screen, go to the following step.
10) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE:
● Be sure to read the explanation of ‘‘Driving pattern’’ on
EC-42 before driving vehicle.
● It is better that the fuel level is low.
1) Start engine.
2)Drive vehicle according to ‘‘Driving pattern’’, EC-42.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.

EC-278
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA
.
NG
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. c If genuine NISSAN fuel EM
1. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler filler cap is not used,
cap design. replace with genuine NIS-
2. Check for air releasing sound while SAN fuel filler cap.
opening the fuel filler cap. LC
If the air releasing sound is heard, go to
SEF434Q .
If the air releasing sound is not heard,
check the following. EC
Was the cap tightened properly?
If Yes, check fuel filler cap vacuum
relief valve.
Refer to ‘‘EVAPORATIVE EMISSION FE
SYSTEM’’, EC-23.
If No, open fuel filler cap, then clean
cap and filler neck thread using air
blower. Retighten until ratcheting sound CL
is heard.

OK
.
NG MT
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK. c Repair or replace.
● Never use compressed air or high
SEF462U
pressure pump.
● Improper installation of service port AT
may cause leaking.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2,
0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
To locate EVAP leak portion, proceed with TF
the following steps.
1. Install the EVAP service port adapter
and the pressure pump securely.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. PD
Select ‘‘EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE’’ of ‘‘WORK SUP-
PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
3. Touch ‘‘START’’ and apply FA
vacuum into the EVAP line until
the pressure indicator reaches
SEF658U the middle of bar graph.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, RA
locate the leak portion. For the
leak detector, refer to instruction
manual for more details.
Refer to ‘‘Evaporative Emission BR
Line Drawing’’, EC-26.
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP can- ST
ister vent control valve. The
valve will close. (Continue to
apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
4. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum RS
cut valve bypass valve. The
SEF200U valve will open. (Continue to
apply 12 volts until the end of
test.) BT
5. Pressurize the EVAP line using
pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to
0.79 inHg). HA
6. Locate the leak using a leak
detector. Refer to the instruction
manual for more details about
the leak detector. Refer to EL
‘‘Evaporative Emission Line
Drawing’’, EC-26.
. OK IDX
sA
(Go to next page.)
SEF503V

EC-279
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT c Repair or replace EVAP
(EVAP canister vent control valve, O-ring canister vent control valve
and water separator). and O-ring or harness/
Refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR connector.
DTC P0446’’ for circuit, EC-292 and
‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, EC-296.

SEF143S OK

.
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATU- c Check the following.
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage.
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister
canister. If it will, weigh the EVAP can- and water separator for
ister with the EVAP canister vent con- clogging and poor con-
trol valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator.
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-283.
If NG, repair hose or
SEF596U OK replace EVAP canister or
water separator.

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT (EVAP canister c Check the following.
purge volume control solenoid valve). ● EVAP canister purge vol-
1. Disconnect EVAP hose to EVAP ume control solenoid
canister purge volume control valve
solenoid valve at EVAP service Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
port. INSPECTION’’, EC-282.
2. Start engine. ● Vacuum hoses for clog-
3. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ ging or disconnection
in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode. Refer to ‘‘Vacuum Hose
4. Touch ‘‘Qu’’ on CONSULT Drawing’’, EC-16.
SEF339V screen to increase ‘‘PURG VOL
CONT/V’’ opening to 100.0%.
5. Check EVAP hose for vacuum.
Vacuum should exist.
OR
1. Start engine and warm it up to
normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect EVAP hose to EVAP
canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at
least 60 seconds.
5. Check EVAP hose for vacuum.
Vacuum should exist.
SEF190V
OK

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace absolute pressure
(Absolute pressure sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-283.

. OK

s
B
(Go to next page.)

SEF328V

EC-280
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
s
B

MA
.
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT NG Repair or replace MAP/
c
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). BARO switch solenoid EM
Refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR valve or harness/
DTC P1105’’, EC-322. connector.
LC
OK
SEF338V
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace tank fuel tempera-
EC
c
(Tank fuel temperature sensor). ture sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-284.
FE
OK
CL
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP control sys-
c
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor. MT
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
SEF334V EC-384.

OK AT
.
CHECK COMPONENT. NG Repair or reconnect the
c
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, hose. TF
fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or
improper connection.
Refer to ‘‘Evaporative Emission Line PD
Drawing’’, EC-26.

OK
.
FA
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) using air blower.
RA
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR BR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
ST
INSPECTION END

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-281
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
1. Start engine.
2. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
3. Check air passage continuity.
SEF190V

Condition Air passage continuity

PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B s s
100.0% Yes
0.0% No

If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check air passage continuity.
SEF660U
Air passage continuity
s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals
No supply No

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP can-

ister purge volume control solenoid valve.

SEF661U

EVAP canister vent control valve

Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
ON No
OFF Yes

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF191V

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
s s
No
minals 1 and 2
No supply Yes

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean valve using air

blower or replace as necessary.
If portion sB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
AEC783A Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

EC-282
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
Water separator
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. MA
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that sA and s C are not clogged by blowing air into s B EM
with s
A , and then s C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
● Do not disassemble water separator. LC
SEF829T

Absolute pressure sensor EC

1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector
connected.
FE
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and check output voltage between
ECM terminal s 45 and engine ground.
The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8V.
CL
4. Use pump to apply vacuum of −26.7 kPa (−200 mmHg, −7.87
inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and
check the output voltage. MT
SEF132V The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4V lower than the value
measured in step 3.
AT
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply vacuum below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg,
TF
−27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92
inHg).
5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-283
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d)
MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Perform ‘‘MAP/BARO SW/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode
with CONSULT.
3. Check the following.
● Condition: At idle under no-load
● CONSULT display

SEF130V MAP/BARO ABSOL PRES/SE (Voltage)

BARO More than 2.6V
MAP Less than the voltage at BARO
● Time for voltage to change
MAP/BARO SW/V Required time to switch
BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO

4. If NG, check solenoid valve as shown below.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.
SEF131V
2. Check air passage continuity.

Air passage Air passage

Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 s Yes No
and 2 s
No supply No Yes

3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace

MEC488B solenoid valve.
Tank fuel temperature sensor
Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown
in the figure.

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90

If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor.

SEF172V

EC-284
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP control system pressure sensor MA
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. EM
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine LC

SEF198V ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V) EC
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
FE
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. CL
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-285
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge

Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
c

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

c

Engine coolant temperature sen- Engine coolant temperature

c
sor

Ignition switch Start signal

c
EVAP canister
purge volume
Throttle position ECM c control solenoid
Throttle position sensor
c
valve

Throttle position switch Closed throttle position

c

Front heated oxygen sensor Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

c
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Tank fuel temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank

c

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

c

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.

SEF337U

EC-286
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) GI
(Cont’d)
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE MA
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EM
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V ● Air conditioner switch ‘‘OFF’’ 2,000 rpm (More than 200 seconds
● No-load —
after starting engine) LC

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION FE
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
CL
Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0 - 1V
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch MT
4 LG/R ECCS relay (Self-shutoff) ‘‘OFF’’

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’

BATTERY VOLTAGE
AT
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ‘‘OFF’’
TF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PD
Engine is running.

Idle speed
FA

EVAP canister purge vol-

5 R/Y ume control solenoid SEF109V RA
valve 12 - 13V

BR
Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. (More than 200

seconds after starting engine) ST

SEF110V RS
67 B/P BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
72 B/P (11 - 14V)
BT
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 B/P Current return
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
HA

EL

IDX

EC-287
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0443 ● An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM ● Harness or connectors
1008 through the valve. (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF712T
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-290.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-290.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-290.

EC-288
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) GI
(Cont’d)
MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC865A

EC-289
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness for open or
SEF339V 2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge vol- short between EVAP
ume control solenoid valve harness canister purge volume
connector. control solenoid valve
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. and ECCS relay
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 ● Harness for open or
and engine ground with CONSULT or short between EVAP
tester. canister purge volume
Voltage: Battery voltage control solenoid valve
and ECM
OK
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.

SEF192V .
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between
s s
ECM terminal 5 and terminal 1 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP canister
c
SEF193V (EVAP canister purge volume control sole- purge volume control sole-
noid valve). noid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-290
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0443
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) GI
(Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION MA
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
1. Start engine. EM
2. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening. LC
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
SEF190V
3. Check air passage continuity.
EC
Condition Air passage continuity
PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B s s FE
100.0% Yes
0.0% No
CL
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MT
SEF660U
Check air passage continuity.
AT
Air passage continuity
s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter- TF
Yes
minals
No supply No
PD
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP can-
ister purge volume control solenoid valve. FA
SEF661U

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-291
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent

Control Valve (Circuit)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid (the EVAP canister vent control valve) responds to
signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve
is energized.
SEF378Q A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evapora-
tive emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
‘‘EVAP Control System (Small Leak)’’ diagnosis.

SEF143S

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE

108 R/G Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
trol valve (11 - 14V)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0446 ● An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through ● Harness or connectors
0903 EVAP canister vent control valve. (EVAP canister vent control valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
● EVAP canister vent control valve

EC-292
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting LC
the next test.
SEF712T
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery EC
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. FE
3) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-295. CL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. MT
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-295.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AT
1) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. TF
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PD
PROCEDURE’’, EC-295.
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-293
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d)

AEC534A

EC-294
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

With CONSULT c Without CONSULT EM

Go to CHECK POWER SUPPLY .
.
OK LC
CHECK CIRCUIT. c
Go to ‘‘CHECK COMPO-
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. NENT’’ after procedure .
SEF143S
2. Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode. EC
3. Make sure that ratcheting sound is
heard from the vent control valve.

NG FE
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control ● Harness connectors CL
valve harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
3. Check voltage between terminal 1s ssM67 , C1
● 10A fuse
MT
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
SEF361U Voltage: Battery voltage ● Harness for open or
short between EVAP
OK canister vent control AT
valve and 10A fuse
If NG, repair open circuit,
short to ground or short to TF
power in harness or con-
nectors.
PD
.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
FA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
ssC1 , M67
● Harness connectors
AEC570A
s s
terminal 108 and terminal 2 . ssM58 , F28
Continuity should exist. ● Harness for open or RA
If OK, check harness for short to short between EVAP
ground and short to power. canister vent control
valve and ECM BR
OK If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors. ST

.
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace EVAP canister RS
c
(EVAP canister vent control valve and vent control valve and
SEF194V O-ring). O-ring.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ BT
on next page.

OK
. HA
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
EL
.
INSPECTION END
IDX

EC-295
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister vent control valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
SEF191V ON No
OFF Yes

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
s s
No
minals 1 and 2
No supply Yes
AEC783A
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean valve using air
blower or replace as necessary.
If portion sB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

EC-296
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System GI

Pressure Sensor
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MA
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is EM
not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board
diagnosis.
LC
SEF340V

EC

FE

CL

MT
SEF954S

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V

PD
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
FA
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
RA
42 BR Sensors’ power supply Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 5V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

43 B/W Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V BR
Idle speed

EVAP control system

62 Y
pressure sensor
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 3.4V ST

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC RS

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0450 ● An improper voltage signal from EVAP control ● Harness or connectors
BT
0704 system pressure sensor is sent to ECM. (The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
is open or shorted.)
● Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure is HA
clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or improper
connection.
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● EVAP canister vent control valve EL
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control
IDX
valve to water separator

EC-297
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
SEF195V
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Make sure that ‘‘TANK F/TEMP SE’’ is more than 0°C
(32°F).
6) Start engine and wait at least 11 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-300.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 and
ground is less than 4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Start engine and wait at least 11 seconds.
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-300.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF196V
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 and
ground is less than 4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Start engine and wait at least 11 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
6) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-300.

EC-298
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC535A

EC-299
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE CONNECTED c Reconnect, repair or
TO THE SENSOR. replace.
Check rubber tube connected to the sen-
sor for clogging, vent, kink, disconnection
or improper connection.

SEF341V OK
.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c Check the following.
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pres- ● Harness connectors
sure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for
ssC1 , M67
● Harness connectors
water.
Water should not exist.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
If OK, go to step 3. If NG, repair or short between EVAP
replace harness connector. control system pressure
SEF325V
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. sensor and ECM
4. Check voltage between terminal 3
and engine ground with CONSULT or
s If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- ssC1 , M67
s
minal 1 and engine ground. ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
ground and short to power. short between EVAP
SEF410Q control system pressure
OK sensor and ECM
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Check the following.
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ECM ssC1 , M67
s s
terminal 62 and terminal 2 . ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
ground and short to power. short between EVAP
control system pressure
SEF411Q
OK sensor and ECM
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister purge volume control sole- purge volume control sole-
noid valve). noid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on EC-291.

. OK

SEF412Q
sA
(Go to next page.)

EC-300
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d) GI
s
A

.
NG MA
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister vent control valve). vent control valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-296. EM
OK
.
NG LC
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP control sys-
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor.
SEF596U Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
on next page.
EC
OK
.
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- c
Clean, repair or replace
GING. rubber tube and/or water FE
Check obstructed water separator and separator.
rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve and clean the rubber tube using air CL
blower.
For water separator, refer to EC-283.

OK MT
.
NG
SEF197V CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATU- c
Check the following.
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage. AT
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister
canister. If it will, weigh the EVAP can- and water separator for TF
ister with the vent control valve clogging and poor con-
attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator.
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT PD
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-283.
If NG, repair hose or
OK replace EVAP canister or
water separator. FA
.
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. c
Check the following. RA
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
s
2. Disconnect connector M67 .
3. Check harness continuity between har-
ssM59 , F27
● Joint connector-1

s s
ness connector M67 terminal 12 and ● Harness for open or
short between harness
BR
ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to power. ground
s
connector M67 and

If NG, repair open circuit or ST

OK short to power in harness
or connectors.
. RS
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
BT
.
INSPECTION END
HA

EL

IDX

EC-301
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP control system pressure sensor
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine

SEF198V ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V)
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

CAUTION:
● Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if
equipped.
● Discard any EVAP control system pressure sensor which
has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.

SEF799W

EC-302
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a MA
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
EM

LC
SEF505U

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE EC

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER- FE
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
CL
1 - 4V

Engine is running. MT
29 G/B Vehicle speed sensor Lift up the vehicle.
In 2nd gear position
40 km/h (25 MPH) AT

SEF111V
TF
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic PD
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
FA
P0500 ● The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed ● Harness or connector
0104 sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
driven. ● Vehicle speed sensor
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-303
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
MEF559D Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Perform ‘‘VEHICLE SPEED SEN CIRCUIT’’ in ‘‘FUNC-
TION TEST’’ mode with CONSULT.
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-307.
If OK, go to following step.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine
2) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. The vehicle speed on CONSULT
SEF199V should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels
with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-296.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,450 - 2,550 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 3,000 rpm (2WD M/T)
2,150 - 3,000 rpm (4WD M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S: More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.1 - 4.8 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 5.3 msec (M/T)
Selector lever: Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL: OFF
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-307.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Lift up drive wheels.
SEF568P
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in ‘‘MODE 1’’ with
GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
4)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-307.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine.
3) Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal s 29
(Vehicle speed sensor signal) and ground with oscillo-
scope.
MEC254C

EC-304
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
4) Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal GI
wave as shown at ‘‘ECM TERMINALS AND REFER-
ENCE VALUE’’ on the previous page.
5)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-307. MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-305
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)

AEC536A

EC-306
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI

INSPECTION START
MA

. EM
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector ss
M59 , F27
● Harness for open or
LC
and combination meter harness con-
SEF200V
s
nector M39 . short between ECM and
3. Check harness continuity between ECM combination meter EC
s s
terminal 29 and meter terminal 34 . If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to
If OK, check harness for short to power in harness or con- FE
ground and short to power. nectors.

OK
.
CL
CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION. NG Check the following.
c
Make sure that speedometer functions ● Harness connectors
MT
properly. ss E43 , E65
● Harness connectors

ss
OK
E32 , E202
● Harness for open or AT
short between combina-
tion meter and vehicle
speed sensor TF
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- PD
nectors.
Check vehicle speed sen-
sor and its circuit. FA
Refer to EL section.

. RA
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
BR
.
INSPECTION END
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-307
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505

Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air

Control (AAC) Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor c

Amount of intake air

Mass air flow sensor c

Engine coolant temperature

Engine coolant temperature sensor c

Start signal
Ignition switch c

Throttle position
Throttle position sensor c

Park/neutral position switch Park/neutral position

c
ECM c IACV-AAC valve
Air conditioner operation
Air conditioner switch c

Power steering load signal

Power steering oil pressure switch c

Battery voltage
Battery c

Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensor c

Ambient barometric pressure

Absolute pressure sensor c

Intake air temperature

Intake air temperature sensor c

This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine
adjustment of the amount of air which bypasses the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The camshaft position sensor detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the ON/OFF time of the
IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine
speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and
engine load (air conditioner and power steering).

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IACV-AAC valve
The IACV-AAC valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM.
The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of air that will flow
through the valve. The more air that flows through the valve, the
higher the idle speed.

SEF040E

EC-308
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d) GI
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Specification data are reference values. MA
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up
Idle Approx. 30% EM
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
IACV-AAC/V
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load
2,000 rpm —
LC
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground). EC
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION FE
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

10.5 - 11.5V
CL

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

MT
Idle speed

AT
SEF645U
101 OR/L IACV-AAC valve
1 - 13V
TF
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PD

SEF646U
FA

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC RA

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause) BR
No.
P0505 A) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors
0205 (The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
● IACV-AAC valve ST
......................................................................................... ...........................................................................................
B) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.)
● IACV-AAC valve
RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-309
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If DTC cannot be
confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.

Procedure for malfunction A

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Wait at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF232U 1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 2 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 2 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313.

Procedure for malfunction B

TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ again and select ‘‘DATA
MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
SEF715T 4) Start engine and run it for at least 6 minutes at idle
speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine again and run it for at least 6 minutes at
idle speed.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313.

EC-310
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d) GI
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. MA
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine again and run it for at least 6 minutes at
idle speed. EM
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
5) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic LC
results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-313. EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-311
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)

AEC537A

EC-312
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
EM
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Stop engine. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness
connector.
ssM59 , F27
● 10A fuse
LC
SEF342V ● Harness for open or
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 short between IACV- EC
and ground with CONSULT or tester. AAC valve harness con-
Voltage: Battery voltage nector and 10A fuse
If NG, repair harness or
OK connectors. FE

.
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
Repair open circuit, short
CL
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 101 and terminal 1 . MT
Continuity should exist.
SEF192V If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
AT
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace IACV-AAC valve. TF
(IACV-AAC valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.
PD
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR FA
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
SEF201V
. RA
INSPECTION END

BR

ST

RS

BT
COMPONENT INSPECTION
IACV-AAC valve
Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. HA
● Check IACV-AAC valve resistance.
Resistance:
Approximately 10V [at 25°C (77°F)] EL
● Check plunger for seizing or sticking.
● Check for broken spring.
IDX
SEF202V

EC-313
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510

Closed Throttle Position Switch

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunc-
tioning.
SEF505V

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE

Accelerator pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
Throttle position switch
28 BR/W
(Closed position) Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
Approximately 0V
Accelerator pedal depressed

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0510 ● Battery voltage from the closed throttle position ● Harness or connectors
0203 switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve (The closed throttle position switch circuit is
opened. shorted.)
● Closed throttle position switch
● Throttle position sensor

EC-314
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
MA
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- EM
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. LC
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
SEF422Q perature.
2) Select ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode EC
with CONSULT and check the value under the following
conditions.
At idle: ON FE
At 2,000 rpm: OFF
If the check result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-317. CL
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds MT
under the following condition.
SEF329U THRTL POS SEN: More than 2.5V
VHCL SPEED SE: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) AT
Selector lever: Suitable position
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
engine load) will help maintain TF
the driving conditions required
for this test.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PD
PROCEDURE’’, EC-317.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK FA
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
SEF422Q throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed. RA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal s 28 and BR
ground under the following conditions.
At idle: Battery voltage
At 2,000 rpm: 0 - 1V ST
3)If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-317.

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-315
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)

AEC538A

EC-316
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
c EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect throttle position switch har- ssM59 , F27
● 10A fuse
ness connector. LC
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ● Harness for open or
SEF158S 4. Check voltage between terminal 5 s short between throttle
and engine ground with CONSULT or position switch and 10A
EC
tester. fuse
Voltage: Battery voltage If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
OK FE
.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
c
to ground or short to power
CL
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
MT
s s
terminal 28 and terminal 6 .
SEF405Q Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power. AT
OK
.
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH TF
IDLE POSITION.
Perform BASIC INSPECTION, EC-74.
PD
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
c FA
(Closed throttle position switch). switch.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
AEC571A
on next page.
RA
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
c BR
(Throttle position sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.
ST
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. RS

.
INSPECTION END BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-317
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Throttle position sensor
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4. Check indication of ‘‘CLSD THL/P SW’’.
Measurement must be made with closed throttle
position switch installed in vehicle.
SEF766W Throttle valve conditions CLSD THL/P SW
Completely closed ON
Partially open or completely open OFF

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to

‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.
5. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace closed throttle position
switch.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness con-
nector.
4. Check continuity between terminals s 5 and s 6 .
Resistance measurement must be made with
closed throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Continuity
SEF159S Completely closed Yes
Partially open or completely open No

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to

‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.
5. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace closed throttle position
switch.

EC-318
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)
Closed throttle position switch GI
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. MA
3. Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4. Check voltage of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle EM
position sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions THRTL POS SEN LC
SEF765W Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Partially open Between (a) and (b) EC
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to FE

‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.
5. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace throttle position sensor. CL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. MT
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal s 23 (Throttle posi-
tion sensor signal) and ground. AT
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle
position sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)
TF
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
SEF767W
Partially open Between (a) and (b) PD
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7

If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to FA

‘‘Basic Inspection’’, EC-74.
4. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in ‘‘Basic Inspection’’, replace throttle position sensor. RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-319
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0605

Engine Control Module (ECM)

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode
selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The unit controls the engine.

SEC220B

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Item
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0605 ● ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0301

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine.
SEF712T 4) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
4) Select ‘‘Mode 7’’ with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
4) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.

EC-320
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0605
Engine Control Module (ECM) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘SELF DIAG RESULTS’’ EM
mode with CONSULT.
3) Touch ‘‘ERASE’’.
OR LC
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select MODE 4 with GST.
3) Touch ‘‘ERASE’’. EC
OR
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode FE
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Refer to EC-48.
CL
.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
MT
See previous page.

.
AT
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 (0301) dis- Yes Replace ECM.
c
played again?
TF
No
.
INSPECTION END
PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-321
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
c MAP/BARO
ECM c switch solenoid
Start signal valve
Ignition switch
c

This system allows the absolute pressure sensor to

monitor either ambient barometric pressure or Solenoid Conditions
intake manifold pressure. The MAP/BARO switch ● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
solenoid valve switches between two passages by ON (Engine is not running.)
ON-OFF pulse signals from the ECM. (One passage OR
is from the intake air duct, the other is from the ● For 5 seconds after starting engine
intake manifold.) Either ambient barometric pres- ON OR
sure or intake manifold pressure is applied to the ● More than 5 minutes after the solenoid valve
absolute pressure sensor. shuts OFF.
and
● Engine running

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve switches its air flow pas-
sage according to the voltage signal sent from the ECM. When
voltage is supplied from the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid
turns ‘‘ON’’. Then, the absolute pressure sensor can monitor the
ambient barometric pressure. When voltage is not supplied from
the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve turns ‘‘OFF’’. Then,
the sensor monitors intake manifold pressure.

SEF417Q

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: For 5 seconds after starting engine BARO
MAP/BARO SW/V ● Ignition switch: More than 5 seconds after turning ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
MAP
● Engine: More than 5 seconds after starting engine

EC-322
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid GI
Valve (Cont’d)
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MA
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s (ECM ground).
32

TER- EM
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ LC

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
‘‘ON’’ 0 - 1V EC
Engine is running.

MAP/BARO switch sole- For 5 seconds after starting engine

118 LG/B
noid valve
FE
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

More than 5 seconds after turning ignition

switch ‘‘ON’’
BATTERY VOLTAGE CL
(11 - 14V)
Engine is running.

More than 5 seconds after starting engine MT

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

AT
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1105 A) MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve receives the ● Harness or connectors
TF
1302 voltage supplied though ECM does not supply (MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve circuit is open
the voltage to the valve. or shorted.)
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve PD
B) There is little difference between MAP/BARO ● Harness or connectors
switch solenoid valve input voltage at ambient (MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve circuit is open FA
barometric pressure and voltage at intake mani- or shorted.)
fold pressure. ● Hoses
(Hoses are clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or RA
improper connection.)
● Absolute pressure sensor
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-323
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
SEF232U switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
Procedure for malfunction A
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V with ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘Mode 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327.

Procedure for malfunction B

TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ again and select ‘‘DATA
MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Make sure that ‘‘TANK/F/TEMP SE’’ is more than 0°C
(32°F).
SEF195V 5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 and
ground is less than 4.2V.

EC-324
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid GI
Valve (Cont’d)
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. MA
6) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327. EM

LC

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- EC
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. FE
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 and
ground is less than 4.2V. CL
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
6) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’. MT
7) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
SEF196V
results)’’ with ECM.
8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-327.

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-325
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Valve (Cont’d)

AEC540A

EC-326
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid GI
Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE MA
If the trouble is duplicated after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction
A’’, perform ‘‘Procedure A’’ below. If the trouble is duplicated
after ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’, perform ‘‘Procedure B’’ EM
on next page.
Procedure A LC
SEF338V INSPECTION START

EC
.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following. FE
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect MAP/BARO switch solenoid ssE43 , M65
valve harness connector. ● Harness connectors CL
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM59 , F27
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 ● 10A fuse
and engine ground with CONSULT or ● Harness for open or MT
tester. short between MAP/
SEF192V Voltage: Battery voltage BARO switch solenoid

OK
valve and 10A fuse AT
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
TF
.
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c PD
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 118 and terminal 1 with FA
CONSULT or tester.
SEF205V
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to RA
ground and short to power.

OK BR
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace MAP/BARO
c
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). switch solenoid valve. ST
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-330.

OK RS
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. BT

.
HA
INSPECTION END

EL

IDX

EC-327
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Valve (Cont’d)
Procedure B
INSPECTION START

.
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE AND CIR- OK CHECK COMPONENT
c
CUIT TO MAP/BARO SWITCH SOLE- (Absolute pressure sen-
SEF338V
NOID VALVE. sor).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal 1. Check for disconnection
operating temperature. of vacuum hose con-
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. nected to the sensor.
3. Connect MAP/BARO switch solenoid 2. Check sensor harness
valve and absolute pressure sensor connector for water.
with a rubber tube that has vacuum Water should not exist.
gauge. Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. INSPECTION’’, EC-283.
5. Select ‘‘MAP/BARO SW/V’’ in
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with OK NG
CONSULT.
6. Start engine and let it idle.
7. Touch ‘‘MAP’’ and ‘‘BARO’’ alter-
SEF130V nately and check for vacuum. .
Replace
MAP/BARO SW/V Vacuum
absolute
BARO Should not exist. pressure
MAP Should exist. sensor.

OR
4. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
5. Start engine and check for
vacuum. .
For 5 seconds after starting Go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
engine NOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
SEF131V Vacuum should not exist. TENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
More than 5 seconds after start-
ing engine
Vacuum should exist.

NG
.
CHECK HOSE. NG Clean, repair or reconnect
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. the hose.
2. Check hose for clogging, cracks, dis- If NG, check vacuum port
connection or improper connection. for clogging.

OK OK
.
SEF676T CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.
Check the intake system
for air leaks.
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

SEF109L

EC-328
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid GI
Valve (Cont’d)
s
A
MA
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
c
Check the following. EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect MAP/BARO switch solenoid
valve harness connector.
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
LC
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM59 , F27
SEF192V s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 ● 10A fuse
and engine ground with CONSULT or ● Harness for open or
tester. short between MAP/ EC
Voltage: Battery voltage BARO switch solenoid
valve and 10A fuse
OK If NG, repair harness or FE
connectors.

. CL
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors. MT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
SEF205V s s
terminal 118 and terminal 1 with
CONSULT or tester.
Continuity should exist.
AT
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
TF
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace MAP/BARO
c PD
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). switch solenoid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.
FA
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. RA

.
BR
INSPECTION END

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-329
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid
Valve (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Perform ‘‘MAP/BARO SW/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode
with CONSULT.
3. Check the following.
SEF130V ● Condition: At idle under no-load
● CONSULT display

MAP/BARO ABSOL PRES/SE (Voltage)

BARO More than 2.6V
MAP Less than the voltage at BARO
● Time for voltage to change
MAP/BARO SW/V Required time to switch
BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO
SEF131V
4. If NG, check MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve as
shown below.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.
2. Check air passage continuity.

Air passage Air passage

Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 s Yes No

MEC488B
and 2 s
No supply No Yes

3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace

MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.

EC-330
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1148

Closed Loop Control GI

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
. The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic. MA
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ... EM
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P1148 ● The closed loop control function does not operate ● The front heated oxygen sensor circuit is open or
0307 even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. shorted. LC
● Front heated oxygen sensor
● Front heated oxygen sensor heater
EC

FE

CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
CAUTION: TF
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- PD
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. FA
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF237V
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle. RA
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. BR
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
4) While holding engine speed at 2,000 rpm, check the
following. ST
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage should go above 0.70V at
least once.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ RS
● ‘‘FR O2 SENSOR’’ voltage should go below 0.21V at
least once.
If the check result is NG, perform ‘‘DIAGNOSIS PRO- BT
CEDURE’’ on next page.
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
5) Let engine idle at least 3 minutes. HA
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,000 rpm after this
step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to EL
step 5).
6) Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive
seconds. IDX

EC-331
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1148
Closed Loop Control (Cont’d)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.5 msec or more (A/T)
1.3 msec or more (M/T)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,500 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,700 - 3,000 rpm (M/T)
Selector lever: Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE: More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
During this test, P0130 may be displayed on the CON-
SULT screen.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ below.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal s 50 (sensor
signal) and ECM ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
AEC873A
● The voltage should go above 0.7V at least once.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
● The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
4) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ below.

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133, EC-175.

EC-332
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320

Ignition Signal GI
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
MA
Ignition coil & power transistor
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor.
The power transistor switches the ignition coil primary circuit on EM
and off. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high
voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit.
The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an LC
assembly except distributor cap and rotor head.
SEF928V
NOTE:
The rotor screw which secures the distributor rotor head to EC
the distributor shaft must be tightened properly.
: 3.3 - 3.9 Nzm (0.34 - 0.40 kg-m, 29.5 - 34.7 in-lb)
FE

CL

MT

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up PD
Idle Approx. 20° BTDC
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
IGN TIMING
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’
● No-load
2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
FA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground). RA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC Voltage) BR
NO.
0 - 0.5V
ST
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
RS
Idle speed

BT
SEF186T
1 PU/W Ignition signal
0.2 - 1.0V
HA
Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. EL

SEF187T IDX

EC-333
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
12 - 14V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

SEF188T
2 B Ignition check
12 - 13V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF189T

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P1320 ● The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent to ● Harness or connectors
0201 ECM during engine cranking or running. (The ignition primary circuit is open or shorted.)
● Power transistor unit.
● Resistor
● Camshaft position sensor
● Camshaft position sensor circuit

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
● If both DTC P0340 (0101) and P1320 (0201) are displayed,
perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340 first.
Refer to EC-252.
SEF712T 1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch
to ‘‘START’’ for at least 5 seconds.)
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-337.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch
to ‘‘START’’ for at least 5 seconds.)
3) Select MODE 7 with GST.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-337.

EC-334
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GI
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch
to ‘‘START’’ for at least 5 seconds.) MA
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds,
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
4) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic EM
results) with ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-337. LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-335
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)

AEC541A

EC-336
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
Yes
s
Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, and restart
c A (Go to next page.)
engine. EM
Is engine running?

No
LC
.
SEF344V NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors EC
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness con- ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
nector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM59 , F27 FE
4. Check voltage between terminal 7 s ● Harness for open or
and ground with CONSULT or tester. short between ignition
Voltage: Battery voltage coil and ignition switch CL
If NG, repair harness or
OK
connectors.
MT
.
AEC698 NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power AT
2. Disconnect power transistor harness in harness or connectors.
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ter- TF
s
minal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to PD
ground and short to power.

OK
FA
.
AEC699 NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power RA
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s
terminal 1 and power transistor termi-
s
nal 1 . BR
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power. ST
OK
.
NG
RS
CHECK COMPONENTS Replace malfunctioning
c
AEC700 (Ignition coil, power transistor). component(s).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, BT
EC-338.

OK
. HA
s
A
(Go to next page.)
EL

IDX

EC-337
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
s
A

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short
c
1. Stop engine. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness con- in harness or connectors.
nector.
3. Strip tape covering resistor and con-
denser.
4. Disconnect resistor harness connector.
SEF238V 5. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
6. Check harness continuity between igni-
s
tion coil terminal 8 and resistor termi-
s s
nal 1 , resistor terminal 2 and ECM
s
terminal 2 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENTS NG Replace resistor.
c
(Resistor).
SEF239V
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK

.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ignition coil
1. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
2. Remove distributor cap.
3. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

s
7 -s
8 Less than 1V

s
7 -s
9 7 - 13 kV
AEC150A
If NG, replace distributor assembly as a unit.

AEC152A

EC-338
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
Power transistor GI
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor & power transistor har-
ness connector and ignition coil harness connector.
2. Check power transistor resistance between terminals s
2 and
MA
s8 .

Terminals Resistance Result EM

Except 0V OK
s
2 and s
8
0V NG
LC
AEC151A If NG, replace distributor assembly.

Resistor EC
1. Disconnect resistor harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals s1 and s2 .
FE
Resistance: Approximately 2.2 kV [at 25°C (77°F)]
If NG, replace resistor.
CL

MT
SEF240V

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-339
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)

(COG)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transmis-
sion housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive
plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
SEF956N
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system.
It is used only for the on board diagnosis.

SEF335V

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
43 B/W Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V
Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

Crankshaft position sensor SEF112V

47 L
(OBD) Approximately 0V

Engine is running.

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF113V

EC-340
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(COG) (Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic MA
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1336 ● A chipping of the flywheel or drive plate gear tooth ● Harness or connectors
EM
0905 (cog) is detected by the ECM. ● Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
● Drive plate/Flywheel
LC

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION EC

PROCEDURE
NOTE: FE
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting CL
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’
mode with CONSULT. MT
2) Start engine and run it for at least 2 minutes at idle
SEF712T speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC AT
PROCEDURE’’, EC-343.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 minutes at idle TF
speed.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PD
PROCEDURE’’, EC-343.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 minutes at idle
FA
speed.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II’’ (Self-diagnostic
RA
results) with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-343. BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-341
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(COG) (Cont’d)

AEC531A

EC-342
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(COG) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws. LC
SEF335V

. EC
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor ● Harness connectors
(OBD) and ECM harness connectors. s s
E202 , E32 FE
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal ● Harness connectors

s s
47 and terminal 2 .
ss
E41 , F25
Continuity should exist. ● Harness for open or CL
If OK, check harness for short to short between ECM and
ground and short to power. crankshaft position sen-

OK
sor (OBD) MT
If NG, repair open circuit or
SEF175V short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- AT
nectors.

. TF
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- s s
E202 , E32 PD
s
minal 1 and engine ground. ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. ssE41 , F25
● Harness for open or FA
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power. short between crankshaft
SEF176V
position sensor (OBD)
OK RA
and ECM
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con- BR
nectors.
.
Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the
ST
crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Then
retest.
RS
Trouble is not fixed.
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace crankshaft posi- BT
c
[Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)]. tion sensor (OBD).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page. HA
OK
.

s
A EL
(Go to next page.)

IDX

EC-343
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)
(COG) (Cont’d)

s
A

.
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors

s
2. Disconnect connector E32 . ssE41 , F25
● Joint connector-1
3. Check harness continuity between har-

SEF552V s
ness connector E32 terminal 2 ands ● Harness for open or
ground. short between harness
Continuity should exist. s
connector E32 and
If OK, check harness for short to power. ground
If NG, repair open circuit or
OK
short to power in harness
or connectors.
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

Trouble is not fixed.

.
Visually check for chipping flywheel or NG Replace the flywheel or
c
drive plate gear tooth (cog). drive plate.

OK
.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

SEF960N

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Resistance: Approximately 512 - 632V
[at 20°C (68°F)]

SEF504V

EC-344
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400

EGRC-Solenoid Valve GI
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. MA
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the sole-
noid valve is energized. The vacuum signal passes through the
solenoid valve. The signal then reaches the EGR valve. EM
When the ECM sends an ON signal, a plunger will then move to
cut the vacuum signal from the throttle body to the EGR valve.
LC
SEF240PD

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE EC

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FE
● Engine: After warming up Idle ON
● Air conditioner switch: ‘‘OFF’’
EGRC SOL/V
● Shift lever: ‘‘N’’ Engine speed: Revving engine from CL
OFF
● No-load idle to 3,000 rpm quickly

MT
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
AT
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
TF
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
0 - 1V
Idle speed
103 G/W EGRC-solenoid valve
PD
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly FA

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

RA
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No. BR
P1400 ● The improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through ● Harness or connectors
1005 EGRC-solenoid valve. (The EGRC-solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
● EGRC-solenoid valve ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-345
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF336V Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecu-
tive seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,000 - 3,400 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2 msec or more
VHCL SPEED SE: Suitable speed
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-348.

SEF241V

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EGR tem-
perature sensor. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal s 103 and
ground at idle.
Voltage: 0 - 1V
SEF242V 3) Check that the voltage changes to battery voltage and
returns to 0 - 1V when revving the engine from idle to
3,000 rpm quickly.
4) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-348.

EC-346
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC542A

EC-347
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
OK
CHECK COMPONENT c Go to ‘‘COMPONENT
(EGRC-solenoid valve.) INSPECTION on next
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. page.
2. Perform ‘‘EGRC SOL/V CIR- If NG, repair or replace
CUIT’’ in ‘‘FUNCTION TEST’’ EGRC-solenoid valve or
mode with CONSULT. repair circuit.
If this mode is not available, use
SEF336V the ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.
OR
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’
and ‘‘OFF’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT and check
operating sound.
OR
1. Start engine and rev engine up
to 3,000 rpm quickly.
2. When disconnecting and recon-
necting the EGRC-solenoid
valve harness connector, make
sure that the EGRC-solenoid
valve makes operating sound.
MEF957D
(The DTC or the 1st trip DTC for
the EGRC-solenoid valve will be
displayed, however, ignore it.)

NG
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect EGRC-solenoid valve har-
ness connector.
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM59 , F27
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 and
ground with CONSULT or tester.
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between EGRC-
SEF594P solenoid valve and 10A
OK fuse
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.

.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
s s
terminal 103 and terminal 1 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.

SEF192V OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGRC-solenoid
(EGRC-solenoid valve). valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END
SEF243V

EC-348
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1400
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
EGRC-solenoid valve
Check air passage continuity. MA
Perform ‘‘EGRC SOLENOID VALVE’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode.
EM
Air passage Air passage
Condition
continuity continuity
s s s s
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between A and B between A and C
LC
ON Yes No
SEF185V OFF No Yes
EC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

FE
Air passage Air passage
Condition continuity continuity
CL
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and s Yes No MT
s
2
AEC919 No supply No Yes

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EGRC-sole- AT

noid valve.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-349
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401

EGR Temperature Sensor

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases
flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR
temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal
sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM
as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature
sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not used to control the
engine system.
SEF599K It is used only for the on board diagnosis.
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MV
0 (32) 4.81 7.9 - 9.7
50 (122) 2.82 0.57 - 0.70
100 (212) 0.8 0.08 - 0.10
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
s
63 (EGR temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 32 (ECM ground). s
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V

SEF526Q

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1401 A) An excessively low voltage from the EGR tem- ● Harness or connectors
0305 perature sensor is sent to ECM even when (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.)
engine coolant temperature is low. ● EGR temperature sensor
● Malfunction of EGR function, EGRC-BPT valve or
EGRC-solenoid valve
................................................................................. ............................................................................................
B) An excessively high voltage from the EGR ● Harness or connectors
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even when (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.)
engine coolant temperature is high. ● EGR temperature sensor
● Malfunction of EGR function, EGRC-BPT valve or
EGRC-solenoid valve

EC-350
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
Perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction A’’ first. If DTC cannot be
MA
confirmed, perform ‘‘Procedure for malfunction B’’.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- EM
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. LC
SEF244V
Procedure for malfunction A
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
EC
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Verify that engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C
(104°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range,
FE
cool the engine down.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC CL
PROCEDURE’’, EC-354.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. MT
2) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
3) Verify that engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C
(104°F). AT
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range,
cool the engine down.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. TF
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-354. PD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Verify that voltage between ECM terminal s 59 (engine FA
coolant temperature) and ground is more 2.7V.
SEF347Q
If the voltage is below the range, cool the engine down.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. RA
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM. BR
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-354.
ST
Procedure for malfunction B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. RS
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F). BT
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Run engine at idle for at least 2 minutes. HA
3) Confirm that EGR valve is not lifting.
If the check result is NG, go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES FOR DTC P1402’’, EC-356. EL
4) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Read ‘‘EGR TEMP SEN’’ at about 1,500 rpm while hold-
ing the EGR valve in full open position by hand. IDX
Voltage should decrease to less than 1.0V.
SEF336U

EC-351
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
If the check result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-354.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
6) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
7) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
8) Check the output voltage of ‘‘THRTL POS SEN’’ (at
closed throttle position) and note it.
9) Start engine.
10) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecu-
tive seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,800 - 2,600 rpm (A/T)
2,000 - 2,600 rpm (M/T)
VHCL SPEED SE: 10km/h (6MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL: 3.0 - 3.5 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 3.5 msec (M/T)
THRTL POS SEN: (X + 0.23) − (X + 0.73) V
X = Voltage value measured at
step 8)
Selector lever: Suitable position
11) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-354.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EGR tem-
perature sensor. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.

Procedure for malfunction B

1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Run engine at idle for at least 2 minutes.
SEF360Q 3) Confirm that EGR valve is not lifting. If NG, go to
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR DTC P1402, EC-356.
4) Check voltage between ECM terminal s 63 (EGR tem-
perature sensor) and ground at about 1,500 rpm with
EGR valve lifted up to the full position by hand.
Voltage should decrease to less than 1.0V.
5) If step 4 is OK, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR
DTC P0400 and P1400 (See pages EC-258 and
EC-345).
6) If step 4 is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,
EC-354.

SEF362Q

EC-352
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC543A

EC-353
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Repair harness or connec-
1. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor tors.
harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
s
3. Check voltage between terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
SEF345V Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ter- in harness or connectors.
s
minal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK
.
NG
AEC720
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EGR temperature
(EGR temperature sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

AEC721

EC-354
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
EGR temperature sensor
Check resistance change and resistance value. MA
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage Resistance EM
°C (°F) V MV
0 (32) 4.81 7.9 - 9.7
50 (122) 2.82 0.57 - 0.70
LC
SEF643Q 100 (212) 0.8 0.08 - 0.10

If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA
SEF526Q
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-355
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402

EGR Function (Open)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
c

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

c

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EGRC-sole-

c ECM c
noid valve
Ignition switch Start signal
c

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

c

This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the ● Low engine coolant temperature
EGR valve to suit engine operating conditions. This ● Engine starting
cut-and-control operation is accomplished through ● High-speed engine operation
the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve. When the ● Engine idling
ECM detects any of the following conditions, current ● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
flows through the solenoid valve. This causes the ● Mass air flow sensor malfunction
port vacuum to be cut. The EGR valve remains
closed.

SEF641Q

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response
to throttle valve opening. The vacuum controls the movement of a
taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR valve.

SEF783K

EGRC-solenoid valve
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the sole-
noid valve is energized. The vacuum signal passes through the
solenoid valve. A plunger will then move to cut the vacuum signal
(from the throttle body to the EGR valve).
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, a plunger will then move to
cut the vacuum signal from the throttle body to the EGR valve.

SEF240PD

EC-356
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC GI
If EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition
that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed.
MA
NOTE:
Diagnosis for this DTC will end when engine coolant tempera-
ture is approx. 50 - 60°C (122 - 140°F). Ignition switch must be EM
turned ‘‘ON’’ (engine start) with engine coolant temperature
below 40°C (104°F) when starting DTC confirmation proce-
dure.
LC
SEF073P

EC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1402 ● EGR flow is detected under conditions that do not ● EGRC-solenoid valve FE
0514 call for EGR. ● EGR valve leaking or stuck open
● EGR temperature sensor
● EGRC-BPT valve CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
NOTE: TF
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting PD
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must FA
be verified in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT
SEF347U before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of
range below, the test cannot be conducted. RA
COOLAN TEMP/S: −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
EGR TEMP SEN: Less than 4.8V
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park BR
the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine tempera-
ture to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine cool-
ant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means ST
other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccu-
rate diagnostic result.
1) Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds. RS
Then turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
SEF245V 2) Select ‘‘EGR SYSTEM P1402’’ of ‘‘EGR SYSTEM’’ in
‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT. BT
3) Follow instruction of CONSULT.
4) Start engine and let it idle until ‘‘TESTING’’ on CON-
SULT screen is turned to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take HA
60 seconds or more.)

EL

IDX
SEF246V

EC-357
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn igni-
tion ‘‘OFF’’ and cool the engine coolant temperature to
the range of −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F). Retry from step
1).
5) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-360.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with
GST.
2) Check that engine coolant temperature is within the
SEF897U
range of −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F).
3) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 63 (EGR
temperature) and ground is less than 4.8V.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
5) Stop engine.
6) Perform from step 1) to 4).
7) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
8) If DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-360.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Check the following voltages.
SEF506V ECM terminal s 59 (engine coolant temperature) and
ground:
2.7 - 4.4V
ECM terminal s 63 (EGR temperature) and ground:
Less than 4.8V
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
5) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-360.
SEF247V ● When using GST, ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CON-
FIRMATION PROCEDURE’’ should be performed twice as
much as when using CONSULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test
Mode II) because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip
DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CON-
SULT or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II) is recommended.

EC-358
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC533A

EC-359
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. c Repair or replace vacuum
Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks hose.
or improper connection.
Refer to ‘‘Vacuum Hose Drawing’’, EC-16.

OK
.
NG
SEF109L CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE CIR- c Check the following.
CUIT. ● Harness connectors
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Perform ‘‘EGRC SOL/V CIR-
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
CUIT’’ in ‘‘FUNCTION TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
ssM59 , F27
● 10A fuse
OR ● Harness for open or
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. short between fuse
2. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve ‘‘ON’’ block and EGRC-sole-
and ‘‘OFF’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ noid valve
mode with CONSULT and check ● Harness for open or
operating sound. short between ECM and
OR EGRC-solenoid valve
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. If NG, repair open circuit or
2. Check operating sound of the short to power in harness
MEF957D solenoid valve when disconnect- or connector.
ing and reconnecting EGRC-
solenoid valve harness connec- OK
tor. (The DTC or the 1st trip
DTC for the EGRC-solenoid
valve will be displayed, however,
ignore it.)

OK
b
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGRC-solenoid
(EGRC-solenoid valve). valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.
SEF184V
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGR valve.
(EGR valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on the next page.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGRC-BPT valve.
(EGRC-BPT valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on EC-362.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EGR temperature
(EGR temperature sensor). sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on EC-362.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-360
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
EGR valve
● Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump. MA
EGR valve spring should lift.
● Check for sticking
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve. EM

LC
MEF137D

EGRC-solenoid valve EC
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘EGRC SOLENOID VALVE’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ FE
mode.
Air passage Air passage
Condition
continuity continuity CL
s s s s
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
MT
SEF185V
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AT

Air passage Air passage TF

Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s
12V direct current supply PD
between terminals 1 and s Yes No
s
2
No supply No Yes FA
AEC919 If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EGRC-sole-
noid valve. RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-361
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
EGR temperature sensor
Check resistance change and resistance value.
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage Resistance
°C (°F) V MV
0 (32) 4.81 7.9 - 9.7
50 (122) 2.82 0.57 - 0.70
100 (212) 0.8 0.08 - 0.10

SEF643Q If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.

SEF526Q

EGRC-BPT valve
1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve.
2. Vacuum from the other port and check for leakage while apply-
ing a pressure above 0.981 kPa (100 mmH2O, 3.94 inH2O)
from under EGRC-BPT valve.
3. If a leakage is noted, replace the valve.

SEF083P

EC-362
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System GI

(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure)
Note: If DTC P1448 is displayed with P1440, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See MA
EC-392.)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC EM

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using vapor pressure in the fuel tank.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass LC
valve will then be opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel
tank. EC
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP can-
ister purge volume control solenoid valve.
FE

CL

MT

AT
SEF918U

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC TF

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No. PD
P1440 ● EVAP control system has a leak. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
0213 ● EVAP control system does not operate properly. ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. FA
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control RA
valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. BR
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system
pressure sensor
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ST
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● Absolute pressure sensor
● Tank fuel temperature sensor RS
● MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to MAP/BARO switch
solenoid valve
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing BT
or damaged.
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water.
HA
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on. EL
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
IDX

EC-363
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or high pressure pump.
Otherwise, EVAP system may be damaged.
● Do not start engine.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
SEF422W ● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
● Always remove service port adapter from service port
when applying air up to 0.69 to 1.38 kPa (5.14 to 10.34
mmHg, 0.202 to 0.407 inHg).
● During the test, clamp the EVAP hose tightly as shown at
left.
● If DTC P1448 is displayed with P1440, perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See EC-392.)
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
SEF346V 2) Clamp EVAP hose as shown at left.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘EVAP SML LEAK P1440’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with
CONSULT.
Follow the instruction displayed.
5) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed.
If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-366.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of ‘‘Driving pattern’’ on EC-42
SEF295U
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to ‘‘Driving pattern’’, EC-42.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the follow-
ing step.
● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the ‘‘Driving pattern’’,
EC-42.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select ‘‘MODE 3’’ with GST.
● If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447’’, EC-386.
● If P0440 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE’’ in ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0440’’, EC-279.
● If P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to ‘‘DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE’’ in ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P1440’’, EC-366.
● If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the
screen, go to the following step.
10) Select ‘‘MODE 1’’ with GST.
EC-364
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 5).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MA
NOTE:
● Be sure to read the explanation of ‘‘Driving pattern’’ on EM
EC-42 before driving vehicle.
● It is better that the fuel level is low.
1) Start engine. LC
2) Drive vehicle according to ‘‘Driving pattern’’, EC-42.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. EC
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO- FE
CEDURE’’ on next page.

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-365
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. c If genuine NISSAN fuel
1. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler filler cap is not used,
cap design. replace with genuine NIS-
2. Check for air releasing sound while SAN fuel filler cap.
opening the fuel filler cap.
If the air releasing sound is heard, go to
SEF434Q .
If the air releasing sound is not heard,
check the following.
Was the cap tightened properly?
If Yes, check fuel filler cap vacuum
relief valve.
Refer to ‘‘EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
SYSTEM’’, EC-23.
If No, open fuel filler cap, then clean
cap and filler neck thread using air
blower. Retighten until ratcheting sound
is heard.

OK
.
NG
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK. c Repair or replace.
● Never use compressed air or high
SEF462U
pressure pump.
● Improper installation of service port
may cause leaking.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042
kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the
system.
To locate EVAP leak portion, proceed with
the following steps.
1. Install the EVAP service port adapter
and the pressure pump securely.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
Select ‘‘EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE’’ of ‘‘WORK SUP-
PORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
3. Touch ‘‘START’’ and apply
vacuum into the EVAP line until
the pressure indicator reaches
SEF658U the middle of bar graph.
4. Using EVAP leak detector,
locate the leak portion. For the
leak detector, refer to instruction
manual for more details.
Refer to ‘‘Evaporative Emission
Line Drawing’’, EC-26.
OR
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’.
3. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP can-
ister vent control valve. The
valve will close. (Continue to
apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
4. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum
cut valve bypass valve. The
valve will open. (Continue to
apply 12 volts until the end of
SEF200U test.)
5. Pressurize the EVAP line using
pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to
0.79 inHg).
6. Locate the leak using a leak
detector. Refer to the instruction
manual for more details about
the leak detector. Refer to
‘‘Evaporative Emission Line
Drawing’’, EC-26.
. OK

sA
(Go to next page.)

SEF503V

EC-366
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
s
A

MA
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT c Repair or replace EVAP
(EVAP canister vent control valve, O-ring canister vent control valve
and water separator). and O-ring or harness/ EM
Refer to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR connector.
DTC P0446’’, EC-292.

OK LC
SEF143S .
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- c Check the following. EC
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage.
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister FE
canister. and water separator for
If it will, weigh the EVAP canister with clogging and poor con-
the vent control valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator. CL
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-370.
If NG, repair hose or MT
OK replace EVAP canister or
SEF596U
water separator.

. AT
NG
CHECK COMPONENT (EVAP canister c Check the following.
purge volume control solenoid valve). ● EVAP canister purge vol-
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to ume control solenoid TF
EVAP canister purge volume valve
control solenoid valve at EVAP Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
service port. INSPECTION’’, EC-369.
2. Start engine. ● Vacuum hoses for clog- PD
3. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ ging or disconnection
in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode. Refer to ‘‘Vacuum Hose
4. Touch ‘‘Qu’’ on CONSULT Drawing’’, EC-16. FA
screen to increase ‘‘PURG VOL
CONT/V’’ opening to 100.0%.
SEF339V
5. Check vacuum hose for
vacuum when revving engine RA
up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OR
1. Start engine and warm it up to BR
normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and let it idle for at
least 60 seconds. ST
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve at EVAP
service port. RS
4. Start engine.
SEF190V 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum
when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm. BT
Vacuum should exist.

OK
HA
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace absolute pressure
(Absolute pressure sensor). sensor. EL
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-371.

. OK IDX
sB
SEF328V (Go to next page.)

EC-367
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
s
B

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace MAP/BARO
c
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). switch solenoid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-371.

SEF338V
OK

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace tank fuel tempera-
c
(Tank fuel temperature sensor). ture sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-372.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP control sys-
c
(EVAP control system pressure sensor) tem pressure sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
SEF334V EC-369.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT. NG Repair or reconnect the
c
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, hose.
fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or
improper connection.
Refer to ‘‘Evaporative Emission Line
Drawing’’, EC-26.

OK
.
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) using air blower.

.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-368
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve MA
1. Start engine.
2. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
EM
according to the valve opening.
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
3. Check air passage continuity.
LC
SEF190V

Condition Air passage continuity EC

PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B s s
100.0% Yes
FE
0.0% No

If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid CL

valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check air passage continuity. MT
SEF660U
Air passage continuity
AT
s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals TF
No supply No

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP can- PD

ister purge volume control solenoid valve.
FA
SEF661U

EVAP control system pressure sensor RA

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected. BR
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure. ST
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine
ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V) RS
SEF198V
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6 BT

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. HA
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EL

IDX

EC-369
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
EVAP canister vent control valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
ON No

SEF191V
OFF Yes

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
s s
No
minals 1 and 2
No supply Yes

AEC783A If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean EVAP canis-

ter vent control valve using air blower or replace as necessary.
If the portion sB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Water separator
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that sA and s C are not clogged by blowing air into s B
with s
A , and then s C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
● Do not disassemble water separator.

SEF829T

EC-370
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d) GI
Absolute pressure sensor
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector MA
connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and check output voltage between EM
ECM terminal s 45 and engine ground.
The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum of −26.7 kPa (−200 mmHg, −7.87 LC
inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and
SEF132V check the output voltage.
The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value EC
measured in step 3.
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. FE
● Do not apply vacuum below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg,
−27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92
inHg). CL
5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor.

MT

MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve AT

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. TF
2. Perform ‘‘MAP/BARO SW/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode
with CONSULT.
3. Check the following. PD
● Condition: At idle under no-load
● CONSULT display

MAP/BARO ABSOL PRES/SE (Voltage) FA

SEF130V
BARO More than 2.6V
MAP Less than the voltage at BARO RA
● Time for voltage to change
MAP/BARO SW/V Required time to switch BR
BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO
ST
4. If NG, check MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve as
shown below.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RS
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.
SEF131V 2. Check air passage continuity.
BT
Air passage Air passage
Condition continuity continuity
between A and B s s between A and C s s HA
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 s Yes No
and 2 s EL
No supply No Yes

IDX
3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace
MEC488B MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.

EC-371
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1440
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
Tank fuel temperature sensor
Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure
or heat gun.

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90

SEF172V If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor.

EC-372
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge GI

Volume Control Solenoid Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION MA
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
c
EM
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
c
LC
Engine coolant temperature sen- Engine coolant temperature
c
sor EC

Start signal
Ignition switch
c FE
EVAP canister
purge volume
Throttle position ECM c control solenoid
Throttle position sensor
c CL
valve

Closed throttle position

Throttle position switch
c MT

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Front heated oxygen sensor
c AT
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Tank fuel temperature sensor
c TF

Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensor
c PD

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
FA
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
RA
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
BR

ST

RS

BT
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP HA
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the EL
valve.

IDX
SEF337U

EC-373
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V ● Air conditioner switch ‘‘OFF’’ 2,000 rpm (200 seconds after start-
● No-load —
ing engine)

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ 0 - 1V

For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
4 LG/R ECCS relay (Self-shutoff) ‘‘OFF’’

Ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’

BATTERY VOLTAGE
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ‘‘OFF’’

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

EVAP canister purge vol- Engine is running.

5 R/Y ume control solenoid SEF109V
valve Idle speed
12 - 13V

SEF110V

67 B/P BATTERY VOLTAGE

Power supply for ECM Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
72 B/P (11 - 14V)

Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE

117 B/P Current return
Idle speed (11 - 14V)

EC-374
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic Trouble
Malfunction is detected when ....
Check Items MA
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1444 ● The canister purge flow is detected during the ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
0214 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid EM
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is valve (The valve is stuck open.)
completely closed. ● EVAP canister vent control valve
● EVAP canister
●
LC
Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)

EC
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NOTE: FE
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting CL
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F). MT
SEF195V
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. AT
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Check that TANK F/TMP SE is 0°C (32°F) or more. TF
6) Select ‘‘PURG VOL CN/V P1444’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with
CONSULT. PD
7) Touch ‘‘START’’.
8) Start engine and let it idle until ‘‘TESTING’’ on CON-
SULT changes to ‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take at least FA
10 seconds.)
SEF248V
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2). RA
9) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-378. BR

ST

RS
SEF249V
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SEF902U

EC-375
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 (tank fuel
temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than
4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
5) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
SEF196V 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-378.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal s 60 (tank fuel
temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than
4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
6) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-378.

EC-376
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC545A

EC-377
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness for open or
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge vol- short between EVAP
ume control solenoid valve harness canister purge volume
SEF339V connector. control solenoid valve
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. and ECCS relay
s
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 ● Harness for open or
and engine ground with CONSULT or short between EVAP
tester. canister purge volume
Voltage: Battery voltage control solenoid valve
and ECM
OK If NG, repair harness or
connectors.

.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
SEF192V
3. Check harness continuity between
s s
ECM terminal 5 and terminal 1 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP control sys-
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-369.

OK
.
SEF193V NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister purge volume control sole- purge volume control sole-
noid valve). noid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-380.

OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister vent control valve). vent control valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-370.

OK
.

s
A
(Go to next page.)

EC-378
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d) GI
s
A

.
MA
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- c Clean, repair or replace
GING. rubber tube and/or water
Check for obstructed water separator and separator. EM
rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve and clean the rubber tube using air
blower.
For water separator, refer to EC-385. LC
SEF596U OK
. EC
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- c Check the following.
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage. FE
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister
canister. and water separator for
If it will, weigh the EVAP canister with clogging and poor con- CL
the vent control valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator.
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-385. MT
If NG, repair hose or
OK replace EVAP canister or
water separator. AT
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. TF

.
INSPECTION END PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-379
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
1. Start engine.
2. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
3. Check air passage continuity.
SEF190V

Condition Air passage continuity

PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B s s
100.0% Yes
0.0% No

If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check air passage continuity.
SEF660U
Air passage continuity
s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals
No supply No

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP can-

ister purge volume control solenoid valve.

SEF661U

EC-380
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent GI

Control Valve (Close)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MA
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid (the EVAP canister vent control valve) responds to EM
signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve
is energized. LC
SEF378Q A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evapora-
tive emission control system components. EC
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the FE
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
‘‘EVAP Control System (Small Leak)’’ diagnosis.
CL

MT
SEF143S

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION TF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

PD
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).
FA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
RA
EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE
108 R/G Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
trol valve (11 - 14V)
BR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic ST
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1446 ● EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed ● EVAP canister vent control valve RS
0215 under specified driving conditions. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve
● Water separator BT
● EVAP canister is saturated with water.

HA

EL

IDX

EC-381
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Close) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
AEC882A
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 0°C (32°F).
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
4) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Check that TANK F/TMP SE is 0°C (32°F) or more.
6) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50
MPH) for a maximum of 15 minutes.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
SEF196V CEDURE’’ on next page.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 60 (tank fuel
temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than
4.2V.
3) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50
MPH) for 15 minutes.
4) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 60 (tank fuel
temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than
4.2V.
3) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50
MPH) for 15 minutes.
4) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)’’ with ECM.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.

EC-382
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Close) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
MA
INSPECTION START

.
NG
EM
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- c Clean, repair or replace
GING. rubber tube and/or water
Check obstructed water separator and separator.
rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
LC
SEF143S
valve and clean the rubber tube using air
blower.
For water separator, refer to EC-385. EC
OK
.
NG FE
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister vent control valve and vent control valve and
O-ring). O-ring.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ CL
on next page.

OK
MT
.
SEF596U
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- c Check the following.
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage.
AT
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister
canister. and water separator for TF
If it will, weigh the EVAP canister with clogging and poor con-
the vent control valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator.
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT PD
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-385.
If NG, repair hose or
OK replace EVAP canister or
water separator.
FA
SEF341V
.
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT
NG
Repair or replace harness
RA
c
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). and/or connectors or
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- replace EVAP control sys-
nected to the sensor. tem pressure sensor. BR
2. Check sensor harness connector for
water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3. ST
3. Check EVAP control system pressure
sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page. RS
OK
.
BT
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
HA
INSPECTION END
EL

IDX

EC-383
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Close) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister vent control valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
SEF191V ON No
OFF Yes

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
s s
No
minals 1 and 2
No supply Yes
AEC783A
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve using air blower or replace as necessary.
If the portion sB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

EVAP control system pressure sensor

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine
ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V)

SEF198V
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

EC-384
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Close) (Cont’d) GI
Water separator
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. MA
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that sA and s C are not clogged by blowing air into s B EM
with s
A , and then s C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
● Do not disassemble water separator. LC
SEF829T

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-385
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System

Purge Flow Monitoring
Note: If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. (See
EC-314.)

SEF918U

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure
sensor to intake manifold vacuum.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a fault is determined.

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1447 ● EVAP control system does not operate properly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
0111 ● EVAP control system has a leak between intake stuck closed
manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber
tube
● Blocked rubber tube
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to MAP/BARO switch
solenoid valve
● Cracked EVAP canister
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
circuit
● Closed throttle position switch
● Blocked purge port
● EVAP canister vent control valve

EC-386
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: EM
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting LC
the next test.
SEF250V
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F). EC
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. FE
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
4) Select ‘‘PURG FLOW P1447’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM’’ in ‘‘DTC CONFIRMATION’’ mode with CONSULT. CL
5) Touch ‘‘START’’.
6) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the MT
SEF251V
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take at least 30 seconds.)
Selector lever: Suitable position AT
Vehicle speed: 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
CMPSzRPM (REF): 500 - 3,100 rpm (A/T)
500 - 3,400 rpm (M/T) TF
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.6 - 3.5 msec
Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 -
212°F) PD
If ‘‘TESTING’’ does not change for a long time, retry
from step 2).
7) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF- FA
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG-
SEF905U
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-389.
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-387
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the
EVAP control system purge flow. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF252V 4) Start engine and wait at least 60 seconds.
5) Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals s 62 (EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor signal) and s 43 (ground).
6) Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at
idle speed.
7) Establish and maintain the following conditions for at
least 1 minute.
Air conditioner switch: ON
Steering wheel: Fully turned
Headlamp switch: ON
Engine speed: Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position:
M/T models
Any position other than ‘‘Neutral’’ or
‘‘Reverse’’
A/T models
Any position other than ‘‘P’’, ‘‘N’’ or ‘‘R’’
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value
stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed for at least
1 second.
8) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ on next
page.

EC-388
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA
.
NG EM
CHECK EVAP CANISTER. c
Replace EVAP canister.
Check EVAP canister for cracks.

OK
LC
.
SEF190V NG
CHECK PURGE FLOW. c
CHECK EVAP PURGE
1. Disconnect EVAP hose to EVAP LINE. EC
canister purge volume control Check EVAP purge line for
solenoid valve at EVAP service improper connection, dis-
port and install vacuum gauge. connection and blocked
2. Start engine and let it idle. purge port. FE
3. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ 1. Turn ignition switch
in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode. ‘‘OFF’’.
4. Touch ‘‘Qd’’ and ‘‘Qu’’ on CON- 2. Disconnect purge hoses CL
SULT screen to adjust ‘‘PURG connected to EVAP can-
VOL CONT/V’’ opening. ister purge volume con-
100.0%: Vacuum should exist. s
trol solenoid valve ( B )
MT
0.0%: Vacuum should not and EVAP service port

SEF367U
exist. s
( A ).
OR 3. Blow air into each hose
1. Start engine and warm it up to and check that air flows AT
normal operating temperature. freely.
2. Stop engine. 4. Check EVAP purge port
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to s C .
TF
EVAP canister purge volume If NG, repair or clean
control solenoid valve at EVAP hoses and/or purge port.
service port and install vacuum
OK
gauge. PD
4. Start engine and let it idle for at
least 60 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum
when revving engine up to 2,000 . FA
rpm. CHECK COMPONENT
SEF368U (EVAP canister purge vol-
While operating EVAP canister
purge volume control sole- ume control solenoid RA
noid valve, vacuum should valve).
exist. Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
6. Release the accelerator pedal INSPECTION’’, EC-391.
and let engine idle.
BR
Vacuum should not exist.

OK ST
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace EVAP control sys-
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor and RS
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- repair or replace harness
SEF341V nected to the EVAP control system and connector.
pressure sensor.
2. Check sensor harness connector for
BT
water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3. HA
3. Check EVAP control system pressure
sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, EL
EC-391.

. OK

s
A IDX
(Go to next page.)

EC-389
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d)
s
A

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP canister
c
(EVAP canister vent control valve and vent control valve and
O-ring). O-ring.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-396.
SEF143S
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
c
(Closed throttle position switch). sensor with throttle position
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, switch.
EC-318.

OK
.
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE. NG Replace it.
c
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube). Check for evidence of leaks.

OK
.
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) using air blower.

.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-390
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve MA
1. Start engine.
2. Perform ‘‘PURG VOL CONT/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’
mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
EM
according to the valve opening.
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
3. Check air passage continuity.
LC
SEF190V

Condition Air passage continuity EC

PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B s s
100.0% Yes
FE
0.0% No

If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid CL

valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check air passage continuity. MT
SEF660U
Air passage continuity
AT
s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals TF
No supply No

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP can- PD

ister purge volume control solenoid valve.
FA
SEF661U

EVAP control system pressure sensor RA

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected. BR
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure. ST
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine
ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V) RS
SEF198V
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6 BT

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. HA
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EL

IDX

EC-391
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent

Control Valve (Open)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid (the EVAP canister vent control valve) responds to
SEF378Q signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve
is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evapora-
tive emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
‘‘EVAP Control System (Small Leak)’’ diagnosis.

SEF143S

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE

108 R/G Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
trol valve (11 - 14V)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1448 ● EVAP canister vent control valve remains opened ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0309 under specified driving conditions. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water
● Vacuum cut valve

EC-392
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Open) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE MA
NOTE:
● If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. EM
● If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before LC
conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Perform ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ when the fuel level is EC
less than 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
● It is better that the fuel level is low. FE
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ CL
mode with CONSULT.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) MT
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
SEF405W
5) Select ‘‘EVAP SML LEAK P0440’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with AT
CONSULT.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE: TF
● If the CONSULT screen shown at left is displayed,
stop the engine and stabilize the vehicle tempera-
ture at 25°C (77°F) or cooler. After ‘‘TANK F/TMP PD
SE’’ becomes less than 30°C (86°F), retest.
(Use a fan to reduce the stabilization time.)
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the FA
range displayed on CONSULT screen, go to ‘‘Basic
SEF669U Inspection’’, EC-74.
● The engine idle portion of this test (See illustration RA
at left.) will take approximately 5 minutes.
6) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed.
If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, go to the following step. BR
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. ST
7) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds, then turn
‘‘ON’’.
8) Disconnect hose from water separator. RS
9) Select ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ of ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode
SEF551V with CONSULT.
10) Touch ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ alternately. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SEF297U

EC-393
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Open) (Cont’d)
11) Make sure of the following.
Condition Air passage continuity
VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
ON No
OFF Yes

If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,

EC-395.
SEF191V
If the result is OK, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’
for ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440’’,
EC-279.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Disconnect hose from water separator.
2) Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness
connector.
3) Verify the following.
AEC783A Condition Air passage continuity
12V direct current supply between
s s
No
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Yes

If the result is NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’,

EC-395.
If the result is OK, go to ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0440’’, EC-276.

EC-394
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Open) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA
.
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR DISCON- EM
NECTION.
Check disconnection of rubber tube to
EVAP canister vent control valve and
clean the rubber hose and/or vent control LC
valve then install properly.
SEF143S
OK
EC
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister vent control valve and vent control valve and
O-ring). O-ring. FE
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.

OK CL
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace vacuum cut valve.
(Vacuum cut valve). MT
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
SEF186S EC-406.

OK AT
.
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- c Check the following.
RATED WITH WATER. 1. Visually check the EVAP TF
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- canister for damage.
ister vent control valve attached. 2. Check hose connection
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP between EVAP canister
canister. and water separator for PD
If it will, weigh the EVAP canister with clogging and poor con-
the vent control valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 3. Check water separator. FA
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION’’, EC-385.
SEF596U
If NG, repair hose or
OK replace EVAP canister or RA
water separator.

.
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace EVAP control sys-
BR
c
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor and
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- repair or replace harness
nected to the sensor. and connector. ST
2. Check harness connector for water in
the sensor connectors.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to step 3. RS
3. Check EVAP control system pressure
SEF341V sensor.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ on
next page. BT
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR HA
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. EL
INSPECTION END

IDX

EC-395
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
Control Valve (Open) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
EVAP canister vent control valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VENT CONTROL/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VENT CONTROL/V between A and B s s
SEF191V ON No
OFF Yes

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
s s
No
minals 1 and 2
No supply Yes
AEC783A
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve using air blower or replace as necessary.
If the portion sB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
EVAP control system pressure sensor
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
ness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
SEF198V
4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal s62 and engine
ground.
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V)
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply vacuum below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91
inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Water separator
1. Check visually for insect nests in water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that sA and s C are not clogged by blowing air into s
B
with s
A , and then s C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
● Do not disassemble water separator.

SEF829T

EC-396
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490

Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit) GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are MA
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from EM
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. LC
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF186S
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake EC
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM FE

CL

MT

AT

SEF918U
TF
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Specification data are reference values. PD
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VC/V BYPASS/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF FA

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

RA
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA BR
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Vacuum cut valve bypass BATTERY VOLTAGE ST

120 P/B Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
valve (11 - 14V)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC RS

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
BT
P1490 ● An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM ● Harness or connectors
0801 through vacuum cut valve bypass valve. (The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is
open or shorted.) HA
● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

EL

IDX

EC-397
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-400.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-400.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF712T
1) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-400.

EC-398
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d) GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC544A

EC-399
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

With CONSULT c Without CONSULT

Go to CHECK POWER SUPPLY .

.
OK
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS c
Go to ‘‘CHECK COMPO-
SEF186S VALVE CIRCUIT. NENT’’ after procedure .
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Perform ‘‘VC/V BYPASS/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE
TEST’’ mode.
3. Make sure that clicking sound is heard
from the vacuum cut bypass valve.

NG

.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass
valve harness connector.
ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. ssM67 , C1
s
SEF364U
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 ● 10A fuse
and ground with CONSULT or tester. ● Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between vacuum
cut valve bypass valve
OK and 10A fuse
If NG, repair harness or
connector.

.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
ssM67 , C1
● Harness connectors
SEF192V
s s
terminal 120 and terminal 1 . ssM58 , F28
● Harness for open or
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to short between vacuum
ground and short to power. cut valve bypass valve
and ECM
OK If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace vacuum cut valve
(Vacuum cut valve bypass valve). bypass valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
SEF253V
on next page.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-400
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)
(Cont’d) GI
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve MA
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VC/V BYPASS/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode. EM

Condition Air passage continuity

VC/V BYPASS/V between A and B s s LC
SEF254V ON Yes
OFF No
EC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FE

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition CL
between A and B
12V direct current supply between terminals Yes
No supply No
MT
SEF351Q If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace vacuum cut
valve bypass valve. AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-401
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491

Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF186S ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

SEF918U

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VC/V BYPASS/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Vacuum cut valve bypass BATTERY VOLTAGE

120 P/B Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
valve (11 - 14V)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1491 ● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve does not operate ● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
0311 properly. ● Vacuum cut valve
● Bypass hoses for clogging
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● EVAP canister vent control valve
● Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve
clogged
● Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canis-
ter clogged
● EVAP canister

EC-402
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION GI
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
MA
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- EM
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. LC
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF255V ● Always perform at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41 to 86°F).
● This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in EC
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. FE
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
3) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds. CL
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5) Select ‘‘VC CUT/V BP/V P1491’’ of ‘‘EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM’’ in ‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with MT
CONSULT.
SEF256V 6) Touch ‘‘START’’.
7) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will AT
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take at least 30 seconds.) TF
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,000 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)
1,000 - 3,200 rpm (M/T)
Selector lever: Suitable position PD
Vehicle speed: 36 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: Less than 4.5 msec
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry FA
from step 3).
SEF912U 8) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF-
DIAG RESULTS’’. If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAG- RA
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-405.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-403
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
1) Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve
bypass valve as an assembly.
2) Apply vacuum to port s A and check that there is no
suction from port s B .
3) Apply vacuum to port s B and check that there is suction
from port sA .
4) Blow air in port s
B and check that there is a resistance
to flow out of port sA .
5) Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
6) Blow air in port s
A and check that air flows freely out of
port sB .
7) Blow air in port s
B and check that air flows freely out of
port sA .
8) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ on next
page.

SEF530Q

EC-404
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI

INSPECTION START
MA
.
OK
CHECK COMPONENT. c
Check the following. EM
1. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum ● EVAP purge line
cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. between EVAP canister
s
2. Apply vacuum to port A and check and fuel tank for clog-
s
that there is no suction from port B . ging or disconnection LC
s
3. Apply vacuum to port B and check ● EVAP canister, refer to
SEF364U
s
that there is suction from port A . EC-23.
s
4. Blow air in port B and check that ● EVAP purge port of fuel EC
there is a resistance to flow out of port tank for clogging
s A . If NG, repair or replace.
5. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and
select ‘‘VC/V BYPASS/V’’ in OK FE
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with
CONSULT, and touch ‘‘ON’’.
OR . CL
5. Supply battery voltage to the Go to ‘‘CHECK COM-
terminal. PONENT (EVAP control
s
6. Blow air in port A and check that air system pressure sensor)’’ MT
s
flows freely out of port B . below.
s
7. Blow air in port B and check that air
s
flows freely out of port A .
AT
NG
.
NG
Check bypass hoses for clogging. c
Repair or replace hoses.
TF
OK
.
NG PD
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace malfunctioning
(Vacuum cut valve, vacuum cut valve parts.
bypass valve).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’ FA
on next page.
SEF530Q OK
.
RA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Repair or replace harness,
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). connectors and/or replace
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- EVAP control system pres- BR
nected to the EVAP control system sure sensor.
pressure sensor.
2. Check sensor harness connector for ST
water.
Water should not exist.
If OK, go to the following step.
3. Check EVAP control system pressure RS
sensor.
SEF341V Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-396. BT
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Repair or replace EVAP HA
(EVAP canister vent control valve). canister vent control valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’,
EC-396.
EL
OK
.
INSPECTION END
IDX

EC-405
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1491
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform ‘‘VC/V BYPASS/V’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode.

Condition Air passage continuity

VC/V BYPASS/V between A and B s s
ON Yes
OFF No
SEF254V

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Air passage continuity

s s
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between terminals Yes
No supply No

If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace vacuum cut

SEF351Q valve bypass valve.

Vacuum cut valve

Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
1. Plug port s C and sD with fingers.
2. Apply vacuum to port s A and check that there is no suction
from port sB .
3. Apply vacuum to port s B and check that there is suction from
port sA .
4. Blow air in port s
B and check that there is a resistance to flow
out of port s
A .
5. Open port s C and sD .
SEF379Q 6. Blow air in port s
A check that air flows freely out of port s
C .
7. Blow air in port s
B check that air flows freely out of port s
D .
If NG, replace vacuum cut valve.

EC-406
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch GI

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
When the gear position is ‘‘P’’ (A/T models only) or ‘‘N’’, park/ MA
neutral position (PNP) switch is ‘‘ON’’.
ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground
exists. EM
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position. LC
AEC877A

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE EC

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FE
Shift lever: ‘‘P’’ or ‘‘N’’ ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF CL
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground). MT
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC Voltage) AT
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

Approximately 0V TF
Park/neutral position Gear position is ‘‘N’’ or ‘‘P’’.
22 L/B
(PNP) switch Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
Approximately 5V PD
Except the above gear position

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC FA

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when .... RA
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1706 ● The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ● Harness or connectors
1003 not changed in the process of engine starting and (The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open BR
driving. or shorted.)
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-407
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
SEF962N 2) Perform ‘‘PARK/NEUT POSI SW CKT’’ in ‘‘FUNCTION
TEST’’ mode with CONSULT.
If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-410.
If OK, go to following step.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Select ‘‘P/N POSI SW’’ in ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with
CONSULT. Then check the ‘‘P/N POSI SW’’ signal
under the following conditions.

Position (Selector lever) Known good signal

‘‘N’’ and ‘‘P’’ (A/T only) position ON

SEF217V Except the above position OFF

If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-410.

If OK, go to following step.
3) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 con-
secutive seconds.
CMPSzRPM (REF): 1,600 - 2,700 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 3,200 rpm (M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S: More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1 - 4.8 msec
SEF964N VHCL SPEED SE: 70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
Selector lever: Suitable position
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-410.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal s 22 and body
ground under the following conditions.

Condition (Gear position) Voltage (V) (Known good data)

‘‘P’’ (A/T only) and ‘‘N’’ position Approx. 0
Except the above position Approx. 5

3) If NG, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE’’, EC-410.

EC-408
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch (Cont’d)
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC863A

EC-409
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (M/T models)

INSPECTION START

.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors

ss
AEC877A
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) E33 , E201
switch harness connector. ● Harness for open or
3. Check harness continuity between ter- short between park/
s
minal 2 and body ground. neutral position (PNP)
Continuity should exist. switch and body ground
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit or
power. short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
OK nectors.

.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
SEF218V 2. Check harness continuity between ECM ssF28 , M58
s s
terminal 22 and terminal 1 . ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ssM65 , E43
● Harness connectors
ground and short to power. ssE33 , E201
● Harness for open or
OK short between ECM and
park/neutral position
(PNP) switch
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
SEF219V
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace park/neutral posi-
(Park/neutral position (PNP) switch). tion (PNP) switch.
Refer to MT section

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

EC-410
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch (Cont’d)
GI
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (A/T models)
MA
INSPECTION START

. EM
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● 10A fuse
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) ● Harness for open or LC
switch harness connector. short between park/
SEF220V 3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. neutral position (PNP)
4. Check voltage between terminal 2s switch and 10A fuse
● Harness for open or EC
and ground with CONSULT or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage short between park/
neutral position (PNP)
OK relay and park/neutral FE
position (PNP) switch
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
CL
OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT
(Park/neutral position
MT
(PNP) switch).
SEF222V
Refer to AT section.
If NG, replace park/neutral AT
position (PNP) switch.

.
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
Check the following.
TF
c
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ssF28 , M58
s
ECM terminal 22 and park/neutral ● Harness connectors PD
s
position (PNP) relay terminal 7 . ssM65 , E43
● Harness for open or
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to short between ECM and
ground and short to power. park/neutral position
FA
(PNP) relay
SEC202B OK If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to RA
power in harness or con-
nectors.

.
BR
NG
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) c
Replace park/neutral posi-
RELAY tion (PNP) relay.
1. Apply 12V direct current between park/ ST
neutral position (PNP) relay terminals
s s
1 and 2 .
2. Check continuity between park/neutral RS
s
position (PNP) relay terminals 3 and
ss s
5 , 6 and 7 .
s s
12V ( 1 - 2 ) applied:
BT
Continuity should exist.
No voltage applied:
Continuity should not exist.

OK HA
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98. EL
.
INSPECTION END IDX

EC-411
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1775

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

(Circuit)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Camshaft position sensor Engine speed

c

Torque con-
ECM c
verter
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
c clutch sole-
noid valve

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

c

The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When is ‘‘OFF’’.
the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is can- ● Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle
celled. When the solenoid valve is turned off, A/T on flat road), lock-up should operate because
lock-up is operational. the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
Conditions for lock-up cancel: ‘‘OFF’’.
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter
‘‘ON’’ when; clutch solenoid valve must be in operation
● Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or (‘‘ON’’ during idle and deceleration, and ‘‘OFF’’
deceleration) during acceleration) and engine speed should
● Engine coolant temperature is below 40°C drop.
(104°F) When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less
● Engine is stopped than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not
Conditions for lock-up operation: change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine
● Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle speed, there will be no lock-up.
on flat road), lock-up does not operate even

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Idle ON
TCC SOL/V ● Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
Approximately 1V
Torque converter clutch Idle speed
115 L/Y solenoid valve (A/T mod-
els only) Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. (11 - 14V)

EC-412
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1775
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items MA
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1775 ● An excessively low voltage from the solenoid is sent ● Harness or connectors
0904 to ECM. (The circuit is open or shorted.)
EM
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

LC

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION EC

PROCEDURE
NOTE: FE
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting CL
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2) Select ‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with CONSULT. MT
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF232U 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-415. AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Select ‘‘MODE 7’’ with GST. TF
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-415.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PD
1) Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn ‘‘ON’’.
FA
3) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-415.
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-413
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1775
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Circuit) (Cont’d)

AEC546A

EC-414
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1775
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Circuit) (Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START
MA

.
EM
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c
Check the followings.
1. Disconnect torque converter clutch ● 10A fuse
solenoid valve harness connector. ● Harness continuity LC
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. between torque con-
SEF507V
3. Check voltage between terminal 1s verter clutch solenoid
and ground with CONSULT or tester. valve and 10A fuse EC
Voltage: Battery voltage If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
OK
FE
.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the followings.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ● Harness connectors
CL
3. Check harness continuity between ECM ssE43 , M65
s s
terminal 115 and terminal 3 . ● Harness connectors
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
ssM59 , F27
● Harness continuity MT
between torque con-
SEF422V OK verter clutch solenoid
valve and ECM AT
If NG, repair open circuit,
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors. TF
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c
Replace torque converter PD
(Torque converter clutch solenoid valve). clutch solenoid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.
FA
OK
SEF232V .
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.
RA

. BR
INSPECTION END

ST
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve RS
1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid
SEF233V valve terminals s1 and s3 .
Resistance: Approximately 25V [at 25°C (77°F)] BT
2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to ‘‘ON-
VEHICLE SERVICE’’ in AT section.
3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals s 1 and s 3 with battery HA
voltage and check the solenoid valve operation.
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be oper-
ated. EL
4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve.

IDX
SEF234V

EC-415
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1776

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Camshaft position sensor Engine speed

c

Torque con-
ECM c
verter
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
c clutch sole-
noid valve

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

c

The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When is ‘‘OFF’’.
the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is can- ● Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle
celled. When the solenoid valve is turned off, A/T on flat road), lock-up should operate because
lock-up is operational. the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
Conditions for lock-up cancel: ‘‘OFF’’.
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter
‘‘ON’’ when; clutch solenoid valve must be in operation
● Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or (‘‘ON’’ during idle and deceleration, and ‘‘OFF’’
deceleration) during acceleration) and engine speed should
● Engine coolant temperature is below 40°C drop.
(104°F) When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less
● Engine is stopped than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not
Conditions for lock-up operation: change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine
● Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle speed, there will be no lock-up.
on flat road), lock-up does not operate even

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Idle ON
TCC SOL/V ● Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm OFF

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
Approximately 1V
Torque converter clutch Idle speed
115 L/Y solenoid valve (A/T mod-
els only) Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. (11 - 14V)

EC-416
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1776
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Cont’d) GI
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items MA
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P1776 ● A/T torque converter slip is occurred in lock-up con- ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
0513 dition. ● A/T hydraulic control system EM
● Torque converter

LC

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION EC

PROCEDURE
CAUTION: FE
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- CL
DURE’’ has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test. MT
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF859U
Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- AT
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’ and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Start engine. TF
4) Select ‘‘TCC S/V FNCTN P1776’’ of ‘‘A/T (TCC S/V)’’ in
‘‘DTC WORK SUPPORT’’ mode with CONSULT.
5) Touch ‘‘START’’. PD
6) When the following conditions are met, ‘‘TESTING’’ will
be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until ‘‘TESTING’’ changes to FA
‘‘COMPLETED’’. (It will take approximately 20 sec-
SEF235V onds.)
Selector lever: D (OD ‘‘ON’’)
Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) RA
CMPSzRPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab
model)
Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab BR
model)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 msec
THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V ST
If ‘‘TESTING’’ is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
7) Make sure that ‘‘OK’’ is displayed after touching ‘‘SELF- RS
DIAG RESULTS’’.
SEF861U If ‘‘NG’’ is displayed, refer to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE’’, EC-419. BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature. HA
2) Perform test drive in ‘‘D’’ position (OD ‘‘ON’’) at least 20
consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
EL

IDX

EC-417
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1776
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Cont’d)
Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab
model)
Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab
model)
Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH)
3) Select MODE 7 with GST.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Perform test drive in ‘‘D’’ position (OD ‘‘ON’’) at least 20
consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab
model)
Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab
model)
Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH)
3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’, wait at least
5 seconds and then turn ‘‘ON’’.
4) Perform ‘‘Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)’’ with ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to ‘‘DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE’’ on next page.

EC-418
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1776
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
(Cont’d) GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START MA

.
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace torque converter EM
c
(Torque converter clutch solenoid valve). clutch solenoid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below. LC
OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace torque converter EC
(Torque converter clutch control valve). clutch control valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.
FE
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR CL
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. MT
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION AT
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid TF
valve terminals s1 and s3 .
Resistance: Approximately 25V [at 25°C (77°F)]
2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to ‘‘ON- PD
VEHICLE SERVICE’’ in AT section.
3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals s 1 and s 3 with battery
voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. FA
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be oper-
SEF233V
ated.
4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. RA

BR

ST

RS
SEF234V

Torque converter clutch control valve BT

1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly.
Refer to ‘‘REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS’’ on AT section. HA
2. Check torque converter clutch control valve.
● Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
● Valve, and sleeve are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
EL
● Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation
and fatigue.
● Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
IDX
SAT740H
3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve.

EC-419
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT

Overheat
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, the engine coolant temperature
will rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
Diagnostic trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
code No. (Possible Cause)
OVERHEAT ● Engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally ● Harness or connectors
0208 high temperature. (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● Radiator hose
● Radiator
● Radiator cap
● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to ‘‘MAIN 12
CAUSES OF OVERHEATING’’, EC-422.

CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the MA
section (‘‘Changing Engine Coolant’’, ‘‘ENGINE MAINTENANCE’’). Also, replace the engine oil.
a. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pour-
ing coolant by kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA section
(‘‘Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio’’, ‘‘RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS’’).
b. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.

OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK

WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
AEC640 If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ on next page.
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to ‘‘DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE’’ on next page.

EC-420
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT
Overheat (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
NG
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK. c Check the following for
Apply pressure to the cooling system with leak. EM
a tester, and check if the pressure drops. ● Hose
Testing pressure: ● Radiator
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) ● Water pump
LC
Pressure should not drop. Refer to LC section
SLC754A CAUTION: (‘‘Water Pump’’).
Higher than the specified pressure may
cause radiator damage. EC
OK
.
NG FE
CHECK RADIATOR CAP. c Replace radiator cap.
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 CL
psi)

OK
MT
.
NG
SLC755A CHECK THERMOSTAT. c Replace thermostat
1. Check valve seating condition at normal
room temperatures. AT
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and
valve lift. TF
Valve opening temperature:
76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/90°C PD
(0.31 in/194°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F)
below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to LC section (‘‘Thermo- FA
stat’’).
SLC343
OK
. RA
NG
Check engine coolant temperature sensor. c Replace engine coolant
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’, temperature sensor.
EC-130. BR

.
If the cause can not be isolated, go to ST
‘‘MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING’’
on next page.
RS
.
INSPECTION END
BT
Perform FINAL CHECK by the following procedure after repair
is completed.
HA
1. Warm up engine. Run the vehicle for at least 20 minutes. Pay
attention to engine coolant temperature gauge on the instru-
ment panel. If the reading shows an abnormally high
EL
temperature, another part may be malfunctioning.
2. Stop vehicle and let engine idle. Check the intake and exhaust
systems for leaks by listening for noise or visually inspecting
the components.
IDX
3. Allow engine to cool and visually check for oil and coolant
leaks. Then, perform ‘‘OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK’’.
EC-421
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT
Overheat (Cont’d)
MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See ‘‘RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRI-
CANTS’’ in MA section.
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See ‘‘Changing Engine
in reservoir tank and Coolant’’, ‘‘ENGINE
radiator filler neck MAINTENANCE’’ in MA
section.
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 78 - 98 kPa See ‘‘System Check’’,
(0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 ‘‘ENGINE COOLING
psi) 59 - 98 kPa SYSTEM’’ in LC section.
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See ‘‘System Check’’,
‘‘ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM’’ in LC section.
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See ‘‘Thermostat’’ and
lower radiator hoses ‘‘Radiator’’, ‘‘ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM’’ in
LC section.
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT Operating See ‘‘Cooling Fan’’,
‘‘ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM’’ in LC section.
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —
gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to res- ● Visual No overflow during driving See ‘‘Changing Engine
ervoir tank and idling Coolant’’, ‘‘ENGINE
MAINTENANCE’’ in MA
section.
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from res- ● Visual Should be initial level in See ‘‘ENGINE MAINTE-
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank NANCE’’ in MA section.
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See ‘‘Inspection’’, ‘‘CYL-
gauge mum distortion (warping) INDER HEAD’’ in EM
section.
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See ‘‘Inspection’’, ‘‘CYL-
tons walls or piston INDER BLOCK’’ in EM
section.
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to ‘‘OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS’’ in LC section.

EC-422
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

Injector GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC547A

EC-423
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Injector (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.

SEF596K

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
102 W/B Injector No. 1
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Idle speed

104 W/R Injector No. 3

SEF204T
..................................................................................... ....................................................
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
109 W/L Injector No. 2

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

111 W/PU Injector No. 4

SEF205T

EC-424
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Injector (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. c INSPECTION END
1. Start engine. EM
2. Perform ‘‘POWER BALANCE’’ in
‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode with CON-
SULT.
3. Make sure that each circuit pro- LC
duces a momentary engine
SEF564N speed drop.
OR
1. Start engine. EC
2. Listen to each injector operating
sound.
Clicking noise should be heard. FE
NG
.
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. c Check the following. CL
1. Stop engine. ● Harness connectors
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
ssF27 , M59
● 10A fuse
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 s ● Harness for open or MT
and ground with CONSULT or tester. short between injector
MEC703B Voltage: Battery voltage and fuse
If NG, repair harness or AT
OK connectors.
.
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short TF
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between injector
s
harness connector terminal 1 and ECM PD
ssss
terminals 102 , 104 , 109 , 111 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground FA
and short to power.
AEC570A
OK
.
NG RA
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace injector.
(Injector).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below. BR
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ST
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

. RS
INSPECTION END
SEF223V
BT
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Injector
1. Disconnect injector harness connector. HA
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 10 - 14V [at 25°C (77°F)]
If NG, replace injector. EL

IDX
SEF625V

EC-425
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

Start Signal

AEC548A

EC-426
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Start Signal (Cont’d)
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE GI
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION MA
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

EM
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
LC
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
EC
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’ Approximately 0V
20 L/OR Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch ‘‘START’’
(11 - 14V) FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-427
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Start Signal (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. c
INSPECTION END
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Perform ‘‘START SIGNAL CKT’’
in ‘‘FUNCTION TEST’’ mode
with CONSULT.
SEF191L OR
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Check ‘‘START SIGNAL’’ in
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with
CONSULT.

IGN ‘‘ON’’ OFF

IGN ‘‘START’’ ON

OR
1. Turn ignition switch to ‘‘START’’.
2. Check voltage between ECM
s
terminal 20 and ground.
SEF111P Voltage:
Ignition switch ‘‘START’’
Battery voltage
Except above
Approximately 0V

NG
.
NG
Check if 7.5A fuse is OK. c
Replace 7.5A fuse.

OK

.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● Harness connectors
SEF109P 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector
and 7.5A fuse.
ssM58 , F28
● Harness for open or
3. Check harness continuity between ECM short between ECM and
s
terminal 20 and fuse block. fuse block
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to short to ground or short to
ground and short to power. power in harness or con-
nectors.
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

SEF224V .
INSPECTION END

EC-428
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

Fuel Pump GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed MA
c Fuel
ECM c pump

Ignition switch Start signal relay

c EM

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several sec-

Condition Fuel pump operation LC
onds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve
engine startability. If the ECM receives a 180° sig- Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for
nal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that 5 seconds
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to per- Engine running and cranking Operates
EC
form. If the 180° signal is not received when the
Except as shown above Stops
ignition switch is on, the engine stalls. The ECM
stops pump operation and prevents battery FE
discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM
does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the
ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the CL
fuel pump.

MT

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AT
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
TF

PD

FA
SEF347V

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE RA

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION BR
● Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running and cranking
Except as shown above OFF ST

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

RS
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC Voltage)
BT
NO.

Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’

HA
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1V
‘‘ON’’
11 W/R Fuel pump relay Engine is running. EL
Ignition switch ‘‘ON’’
BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than 5 seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) IDX
switch ‘‘ON’’

EC-429
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)

AEC549A

EC-430
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
c
INSPECTION END EM
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be LC
felt on the fuel feed hose for 5 sec-
SEF348V onds after ignition switch is turned
‘‘ON’’. EC
NG

. FE
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
c
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ● 15A fuse
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. ● Harness for open or CL
3. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’. short between fuse and
s
4. Check voltage between terminals 2 , fuel pump relay
s 5 and ground with CONSULT or If NG, repair harness or MT
tester. connectors.
SEF349V Voltage: Battery voltage

OK AT
.
CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIR- NG Check the following.
c TF
CUIT. ● Harness connectors
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ssC1 , M67
● Harness for open or
2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connec- PD
tor. short between fuel pump
3. Check harness continuity between ter- and body ground
s
minal P2 and body ground, terminal ● Harness for open or
FA
s s
P1 and fuel pump relay terminal 3 . short between fuel pump
SEF225V Continuity should exist. and fuel pump relay
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit or
RA
ground and short to power. short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
OK
nectors.
BR
.
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
c
● Harness connectors
ST
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM ssF28 , M58
s
terminal 11 and fuel pump relay termi- ● Harness for open or
RS
s
nal 1 . short between ECM and
SEF350V Continuity should exist. fuel pump relay
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit or
ground and short to power. short to ground or short to
BT
power in harness or con-
OK
nectors.
.
HA
s
A
(Go to next page.)
EL

IDX

EC-431
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
s
A

.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump relay.
c
(Fuel pump relay).
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel
pump harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
3. Turn fuel pump relay ‘‘ON’’ and
‘‘OFF’’ in ‘‘ACTIVE TEST’’ mode
with CONSULT and check oper-
ating sound.
OR
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPEC-
TION’’ on next page.

OK
.
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump.
c
(Fuel pump).
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
on next page.
SEF226V
OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

SEF227V

MEF309F

EC-432
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
Fuel pump relay
Check continuity between terminals s
3 and s
5 . MA
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply EM
s s
Yes
between terminals 1 and 2
No current supply No
LC
If NG, replace relay.
SEF511P

Fuel pump EC
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals s P1 and s
P2 .
FE
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0V [at 25°C (77°F)]
If NG, replace fuel pump.
CL

MT
SEF228V

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-433
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch

AEC866A

EC-434
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION GI
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The MA
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
EM

LC
SEF351V

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE EC

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FE
Steering wheel is in neutral position
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
the engine CL
The steering wheel is fully turned ON

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s32 (ECM ground).
TER-
WIRE DATA AT
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running. TF
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pres- Steering wheel is fully turned.
39 GY/R
sure switch Engine is running.
PD
Approximately 5V
Steering wheel is not turned.
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-435
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START

.
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. c INSPECTION END
1. Turn ignition switch ‘‘ON’’.
2. Perform ‘‘PW/ST SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT’’ in ‘‘FUNCTION TEST’’
mode with CONSULT.
OR
MEF023E 1. Start engine.
2. Check ‘‘PW/ST SIGNAL’’ in
‘‘DATA MONITOR’’ mode with
CONSULT.
Steering is in neutral
position:
OFF
Steering is fully turned:
ON
OR
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM
s
terminal 39 and ground.
Voltage:
When steering wheel is fully
SEF591I turned.
Approximately 0V
Except above
Approximately 5V

NG
.
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. c Repair open circuit, short
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
s s
terminal 39 and terminal 1 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
SEF662P OK
.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT c Replace power steering oil
(Power steering oil pressure switch). pressure switch.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END
SEF229V

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Power steering oil pressure switch
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness con-
nector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between terminal s
1 and ground.

Conditions Continuity
Steering wheel is fully being turned Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned No
SEF230V
If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch.
EC-436
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC551A

EC-437
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
When the air conditioner is on, the IACV-FICD solenoid valve sup-
plies additional air to adjust to the increased load.

SEF342V

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and s
32 (ECM ground).

TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ‘‘ON’’*.
12 P Air conditioner relay
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
A/C switch is ‘‘OFF’’. (11 - 14V)

Engine is running.

Both air conditioner switch and blower switch Approximately 0V

Air conditioner dual-pres- are ‘‘ON’’. (Compressor operates)
21 G/R
sure switch
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Air conditioner switch is ‘‘OFF’’. (11 - 14V)

*: Ambient air temperature above 10°C (50°F) and in any mode except ‘‘OFF’’.

EC-438
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
.
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
c
INSPECTION END EM
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. LC
800±50 rpm (in ‘‘N’’ position)
MEF634E If NG, adjust idle speed.
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower EC
fan switch ‘‘ON’’.
4. Recheck idle speed.
875 rpm or more (in ‘‘N’’ position) FE
NG
.
Check if air conditioner compressor func- NG Refer to HA section CL
c
tions normally. (‘‘TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES’’).
OK
MT
.
SEF342V NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
c
1. Stop engine. ● Harness connectors AT
2. Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve ssE43 , M65
● Harness connectors
harness connector.
3. Start engine, then turn air conditioner ssM59 , F27
● Harness for open or
TF
switch and blower fan ‘‘ON’’.
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 s short between IACV-
and ground with CONSULT or tester. FICD solenoid valve har- PD
Voltage: Battery voltage ness connector and air
conditioner relay
OK
If NG, repair open circuit, FA
short to ground or short to
SEF133V power in harness or con-
nectors. RA
.
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
c
Repair open circuit, short BR
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal to ground or short to power
operating temperature. in harness or connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ‘‘OFF’’. ST
3. Check harness continuity between ter-
s
minal 1 and body ground.
Continuity should exist. RS
If OK, check harness for short to
SEF134V ground and short to power.

OK BT
.

s
A
(Go to next page.) HA

EL

IDX

EC-439
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
s
A

.
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace IACV-FICD sole-
c
(IACV-FICD solenoid valve). noid valve.
Refer to ‘‘COMPONENT INSPECTION’’
below.

OK
.
Perform ‘‘TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT’’, EC-98.

.
INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve harness connector.
● Check for clicking sound when applying 12V direct current to
terminals.

SEF231V

● Check plunger for seizing or sticking.

● Check for broken spring.

SEF097K

EC-440
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS

MIL & Data Link Connectors GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AEC864A

EC-441
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

General Specifications
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel pressure at idling
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Approximately
Vacuum hose is connected
235 (2.4, 34)
Approximately
Vacuum hose is disconnected
294 (3.0, 43)

Inspection and Adjustment

Target idle speed*1 rpm
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
No-load*2 EGR temperature Voltage Resistance
800±50 °C (°F) V MV
(in ‘‘N’’ position)
Base idle speed*3 rpm 0 (32) 4.81 7.9 - 9.7

No-load*2 50 (122) 2.81 0.57 - 0.70

750±50
(in ‘‘N’’ position) 100 (212) 0.8 0.08 - 0.10
Air conditioner: ON
875 or more
(in ‘‘N’’ position)
Ignition timing 20°±2° BTDC*3
FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
*1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected
*2: Under the following conditions: HEATER
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● Electric load: OFF (Lights & heater fan) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] V 2.3 - 4.3
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
*3: Throttle position sensor harness connector disconnected or using
CONSULT ‘‘WORK SUPPORT’’
FUEL PUMP
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] V 0.2 - 5.0
IGNITION COIL
Primary voltage V 12
Primary resistance
[at 20°C (68°F)] V
Approximately 1.0 IACV-AAC VALVE
Secondary resistance Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] V Approximately 10
Approximately 10
[at 20°C (68°F)] kV

INJECTOR
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] V 10 - 14
Supply voltage V Battery voltage (11 - 14)
Output voltage at idle V 0.9 - 1.8*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT 0.9 - 5.8 at idle* RESISTOR
or GST) gzm/sec 7.5 - 13.2 at 2,500 rpm*
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] kV Approximately 2.2
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running
under no-load.

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Voltage (at normal operating
SENSOR Throttle valve conditions temp., engine off, ignition switch
on)
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85V
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7V
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

EC-442
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
CALCULATED LOAD VALUE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER GI
Calculated load value % Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] V 2.3 - 4.3
(Using CONSULT or GST)
MA
At idle 9.5 - 34.0%
At 2,500 rpm 13.9 - 24.9%
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD)
EM
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] V 512 - 632V

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR LC

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kV
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
EC
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

EC-443
NOTES

EC-444